la- - I
I
I
la-
24-hour
1
Wearin!. safety belt correctly is one of the most important
-2- .. .$ 3
q
ri, ,.e
f'
ri'
Q $
:'
~
I
_.I'
.
..<. v
Control, press 9
I, a r e s and hold the SEEK right arrow until the correcg
I T 0 set the clock on systems without Automatic Tone
Supplement to the1998 Chevrolet Blazer,GMC Jimmy and
Oldsmobile Bravada Owner’s Manuals
This information replaces the Heated Front Seats text in
the “Seats and Restraint Systems” section of your
owner’s manual.
Heated Front Seats(If Equipped)
.
STFFO4-01
,
If you have this feature, the
control is located on the
side of the seat. This feature
will quickly heat the lower
cushion and lower backof
the driver and front
passenger seats for
added comfort.
Press the lower partof the switch to turn the heater on
low. Press the upper partof the switch to turn the heater
on high. Put theswitch in the center position to turn the
heater off.
The passenger’s safety beltmusI oe engaged for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
NOTES
2
Supplement to the1998 Chevrolet SlO (with ZR2 Suspension) and
Chevrolet Blazer (withZR2 Suspension) Owner’s Manuals
This information should be included with the “Daytime
Running Lamps ( D m ) ” information located in
Section 2 in your owner’s manual.
This information should be included with the “Engine
Compartment Fuse Block” information located in
Section 6 in your owner’s manual.
Vehicles built for the U.S. domestic market are not
equipped with Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
DRL
Part Number 15040820
Not used for Daytime Running Lamps in
vehicles built for the U.S. domestic market.
“Copyxight General Motors Corporation 1998
All Rights Reserved
1
. ',
.
.
.
.....
.,--. .. .
.L
....
- .:
_. - .
,
....
2
. * ..,
.
,.,
.. ..
Tk:: 1998 Chevrolet Blazer Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tellsyou how to use your seats and safety belts properly.It also explains the“SIR’ system.
2- 1
Features and Controls
This section explains howto start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tellsyou how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how
to operate your audio system.
4- l
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road how
and to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells whatto do if you have a problem while driving, suchas a flat tire or overheated engine,etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance
Care
Here the manual tellsyou how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tellsyou when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8- 1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you howto contact Chevrolet for assistance and
how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
8-10.
9- 1
Index
Here’s an alphabeticallisting of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
3
CHEVROLET
GENERAL MOTORS, GM,the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name BLAZER areregistered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includesthe latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without
further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever itappears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re onthe road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leavethis manual in it so the new
owner can useit.
Litho in U.S.A.
C98 11 B First Edition
ii
We support voluntary
technician certification.
L..J
CERTIFIED
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propribtaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN MarketingServices Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauqa, Ontario L5T 1B9
@CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
About DrivingYour Vehicle
Safety Warnings and Symbols
As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
an accident. Be sure to read the “on-pavement” and
“off-road” driving guidelines in this manual. (See
“Driving Guidelines” and “Off-Road Driving with
Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in theIndex.)
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTIONto tell you
about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore
the warning.
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manualfrom beginning
to end when theyfirst receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. Inthis manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words worktogether to explain
things quickly.
Index
The!!anthereissomethingthatcouldhurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you whatthe hazard is. Then
we tell you what todo to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’llfind it.
iii
You will alsofind a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
In the notice area,we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and
it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what
to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labelson your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you willfind these notices:
I NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you mayfind on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
TURN
SIGNALS
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
COOLANT
TEMP
e
CAUSTIC
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
BRAKE
BURNS
COOLANT
POWER
WINDOW
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
1,11,
...
0
#0
DAYTIME
RUNNING *
LAMPS "'
FOG LAMPS
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
VENTILATING
FAN
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
--
FUSE
-%-
LIGHTER
m
I
(a)
h
HORN
SPEAKER
e,
FUEL
b
b
93
(@)
J
V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Two-Door Utility
vi
Four-Door Utility
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle andhow to use your safety belts properly.
You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety
belts.
1-2
1-10
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-30
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint (SIR) System
Center Front Passenger Position
(4-DOOr Models)
1-32
1-35
1-38
1-39
1-42
1-53
1-56
1-56
1-57
Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for Children
and Small Adults (4-DOOr Models)
Center Rear Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, andfold them up and down.
Manual Front Seat
You can lose controlof the vehicleif you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when Move the lever under the front of the manual seat up to
the vehicleis not moving.
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you wantit. Then
release the lever and try to move the seat with your body
to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-2
Manual Lumbar Support
If you have this feature,
there will be a knob on the
outside of the driver and
passenger bucket seats.
Power Driver’s Seat(If Equipped)
If you have this feature, there willbe a control pad on
your driver’s seat.
Turn the knob to the left to
increase lumbar support and
to the right to decrease
lumbar support.
Horizontal Control:Raise the front of the seat by
raising the forward edge of the button. Lowerthe front
of the seat by lowering the forward edge of the button.
Move the seat forward by moving the whole button
toward the front of the vehicle.
1-3
Raise the rear of the seat by raising the rear edge of the
button. Lowerthe rear of the seat by lowering the rear
edge of the button. Movethe seat rearward by moving
the whole button towardthe rear of the vehicle.
Moving the whole button upor down raises or lowers
the whole seat.
Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
If you have thiscontrol, it is
located on the side of the
driver’s seat.
Vertical Control: Move the reclining front seatback
rearward by moving the button towardthe rear of the
vehicle. Move the seatback forward by moving
the
button toward thefront of the vehicle.
Press and holdthe front of the control until you havethe
desired lumbar support.To decrease lumbar support,
press and hold the rear of the control.
1-4
Heated Front Seats(If Equipped)
Reclining Front Seatbacks
If you have this feature,
the control is located on
the side of the seat. This
feature will quickly heat
the lower cushion and
lower backof the driver
and front passenger seats
for added comfort.
Press the lower part of the switch
to turn the heateron
low. Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater
on high. Put the switchin the center positionto turn the
heater off.
Release the lever to lock the seatback whereyou
want it. Pull up on the lever and theseat will go to an
upright position.
1-5
But don’t have a seatback reclined
if your vehicle
is moving.
1-6
Sitting ina reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their
job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulderbelt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap beltcan’t do itsjob either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt
forces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones.
This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
For proper protectionwhen the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable
on others. Slide an adjustable headrestraint up or down
so that the topof the restraint is closest to the top of
your ears. This position reduces the chance
of a neck
injury in a crash.
To return the seatbackto the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until the
latch catches. If the
seatback was reclined before being folded forward,it
will return to the reclined position.
The head restraints tilt forward and rearwardalso.
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Seatback Latches
The front seatback folds
forward to let people get
into the back seat or to
access the storage area
behind the seat.
To fold the front seatback
forward, rotate the handle
on the side ofthe seat
rearward and pull the
seatback forward.
Easy Entry Seat(2-Door Models)
The right front seat of your vehicle makesit easy to get
in and out of the rear seat.
Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and
the whole seat will slide forward.
0
Move the seatback to its original position after
someone gets into the rear seat area. Thenmove the
seat rearward until it locks.
1-7
’ /d
CAUTION:
I
I
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used
on an easy entry seat
it, be sure to push rearward
to be sure itis locked.
0
Tilt the seatback completely forward againto
get out.
Rear Seats
Your vehicle hasa’foldingrear seat which lets youfold
the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
The rear seat release handles are
on the rearof the
seatbacks. Push back on the seatbacks as you pull up
on the handles.The head restraint will automatically
fold outof the way when the seatbackis folded down.
To raise the seatbacks, just lift up the seatbacks and
push until they lock in the upright position. Push and
pull on the seatbacks to check that the latches have
locked in the upright position.If they haven’t, have
them fixed immediately.
1-8
On two-door models withan inside mounted spare tire,
the driver’s side rear seat head restraint must be lifted
and held upright as the seatback is raised.Otherwise, the
head restraint will hit the spare tire and prevent the
seatback from properly latching.
Push and pull onthe head restraints to check that they
have locked in the upright position. If they haven’t, have
them fixed immediately.
The rear seat headrestraints are adjustable. Push the
button located underthe head restraint to raise or lower
it. Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of
the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. After
releasing the button, push and pullon the head restraint
to make sure it’s locked in place.
To return the headrestraints to the upright position,
reach behind the seats and pull the headrestraint up until
it locks into position.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR), or air bag system.
A CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where
he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If
you are ina crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the
vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously
injured orkilled. In the same crash,
you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, andcheck that yourpassengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-10
A CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside
of a vehicle. In acollision,
people riding in theseareas are morelikely to be
seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to
ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure
everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and
using a
safety belt properly.
-
A
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt ReminderLight” in
the Index.)
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes aremild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts theycould have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In m . ~crashes
~ t buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety BeltsWork
When YOU ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Put someoneon it.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel...
1-13
wear safety belts?
A:
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does.
You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bonestake the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them inthe future. But they are
supplemental systemsonly; so they work with
safety belts-- not insteadof them. Everyair bag
system ever offered for salehas required the use of
safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to getthe most
protection. That’s true not only infrontal collisions,
but especially inside and other collisions.
&:
A:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
You may be an excellent driver, but ifyou’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safe
belts and children. And there are different rules for smalle
children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see the part of
this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know whichrestraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1 . Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit UD straight.
1-15
Pull up onthe latch plate to make sureit is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle
is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
e
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up the
on shoulder belt.
1-16
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would applyforce atyour abdomen.This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder isbelt
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-18
@
What’s wrong with this?
[ON:
You can be seriously injuredif your beltis
buckled in the wrong place like this.
In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forceswould be there, notat the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
I
A:
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
@
What's wrong with this?
r'
23
A:
The shoulder beltis worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the
ribs, which aren't as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internalorgans
like your liver or spleen.
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injuredby a twisted belt.In
a crash, you wouldn't have the full width
of the
belt to spread impact forces.If a beltis twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly,or ask
your dealer tofix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be
seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button onthe buckle.
The belt shouldgo back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage boththe
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion shouldbe worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-22
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother, When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetuswon’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) System
Right Front Passenger Position
Your vehicle has “Next Generation” reduced-force
frontal air bags -- one airbag for the driver and another
air bag for the right front passenger.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in
this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for onething.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the beltout all
the way, you willengage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let thebelt go back all the
way and start again.
This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) system or air bag system.
Reduced-force frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very
quickly if they are to do their job and comply with
federal regulations.
1-23
Here are the most important thingsto know about the air
bag system:
CAUTION:
I
YOI :an be severely i: - !d or killed in a cr; I if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during
a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things
inside thevehicle or being ejected fromit. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags even reduced-force air
bags are designed to workwith safety belts,
but don’t replacethem. Air bags are designed to
work only in moderate tosevere crashes where
the frontof your vehicle hits something. They
aren’t designed to inflateat all in rollover, rear,
side or low-speed frontal crashes. And, for
unrestrained occupants, reduced-force air
bags
may provideless protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful air
bags have provided inthe
past. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly whether or notthere’s an
air bag for thatperson.
--
--
--
--
1-24
Air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. This is true
even with reduced-force frontal air bags. Safety
belts help keepyou in position beforeand during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with
reduced-force air bags. The driver shouldsit as
far back aspossible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
A
Children who are up against, or very close to,an
air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. This istrue even thoughyour vehicle
has reduced-force frontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offerthe best protectionfor
adults, but not for young children and infants.
Neitherthe vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air
bag system is designedfor them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Children”and
see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the
right frontpassenger’s safety belt.
1 $
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air
bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag ReadinessLight” in the Index
for more information.
1-25
How the Air Bag System Works
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’sside.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering. wheel.
1-26
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attachor put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designedto inflate in a moderateto severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed isabove the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goesstraight into a
wall that doesn’t moveor deform, the threshold level is
about 14 to 18 mph (23 to 29 k d h ) . The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that willmove or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level willbe higher. The
air bag is not designedto inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation wouldnot
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether anair
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined bythe angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows downin frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designedto work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safetybelt. See “Off-Road
Driving’’ in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact ofsufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel infront of the
right front passenger.
1-27
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force
of
the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually.But air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motionis not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What will you see afteran air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates,it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module -- the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag
-- will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. Therewill be
some smoke and dust coming from ventsin the deflated
air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent thedriver from
seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does
it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-28
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
so.
vehicle should get out as soon it
asis safe to do
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by openinga window or door.
Air bags are designedto inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need somenew parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t getthem, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,
which records information about theair bag system.
The module records information aboutthe readiness
of the system, when the sensors are activated and
driver’s safety belt usageat deployment.
0
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
system. Improper service can mean that your air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.Air bags affecthow your vehicle should beserviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is workingon your vehicle. Your
NOTICE:
dealer and the GM Service Manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and theair bag system. To
If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
right frontpassenger’s air bag, the bagmay not
Publications’’ in the Index.
work properly. You may have to replace the
air
bag module in the steering
wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
CAUTION:
right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag
coverings.
For up totwo minutes after the ignition
key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
If your vehicle ever gets ainto
lot of water-- such as water up bag can still inflate during improper
service. You
to the carpeting or higher-- or if water enters your vehicle
can be injured if you are close to an air bag
when
and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller
can be soaked and
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
ruined. If this ever happens, and then you
start your vehicle,
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably partof
the damage could make the air bags inflate, even if there’s no
crash. You would have to replace the air bags as well as the the air bagsystem. Be sure tofollow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
sensors and related parts.
If your vehicle is ever ain
flood, or
performing work foryou is qualified to doso.
if it’s exposed to water thatsoaks the carpet, you can avoid
needless repair costs by turning
off the vehicle immediately.
it, unless the
Don’t let anyone start the vehicle, even to tow
The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.
battery cables are first disconnected.
/A
1-29
Adding Equipmentto Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
@’
If I add a push bumper
bf iibicycle rack to the
front ofmy vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
Center Front Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
e.’’
Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag systemfrom
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly ifyou relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions aboutthis, you
should contact Customer Assistance before
you
modify your vehicle.(The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)
Lap Belt
If your vehicle hasa front bench seat, someone can sit in
the center position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which hasno retractor. To make
the belt longer,tilt the latch plate and pullit along
the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pullits free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and releaseit the same way as the
lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough
see “Safety Belt Extender”at the endof this section.
Make sure the release button on
the buckle is positioned
SO YOU would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-31
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people inthe rear
seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted canbe thrown
out of the vehicle ina crash. And they canstrike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t letit get twisted. The shoulder belt maylock if
you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the beltgo back slightlyto unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows havelap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1-32
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pullup on the shoulder part.
1-33
I
I
I
I
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply forceat your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the
chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety beltalso locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
CAUTIi- N:
I
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
1-34
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for Children and Small Adults
(4-DoorModels)
Four-door models haverear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This feature will provide addedsafety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt,
the comfort guide pulls the belt awayfrom the neck
and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger positionin
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children whohave outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides maybe installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s howto install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-35
1
1. Pull the elastic cordout from between the edgeof
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-36
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place
the guide
over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the beltinto
the slots of the guide.
.. ... ... ... . . ...,:
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted andit lies flat.
The elastic cord mustbe under the belt and the guide
on top.
4. Buckle, position andrelease the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
1-37
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take themout from
the guides, Pull the guide upwardto expose its storage
clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Rotate the
guide andclip inward and in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the
loop of elastic
cord exposed.
Lap Belt
Center Rear PassengerPosition
@-DoorModels)
When you sit in the center rearseating position, you
have a lap safety belt which has a retractor.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou.
Don’t let it get twisted,
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plateto make sure it is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.
1-38
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled northe age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children upto some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Childrenand Babies
I-
A CAUTION:
I
4. Position and release it the same way as the lap part
of a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’t longenough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
Children who are up against, or
very close to, any
air bagwhen it inflates canbe seriously injured
or killed. This is true even though yourvehicle
has reduced-force frontalair bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for
adults, but not for young children and infants.
Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor
its air
bag systemis designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your
vehicle.
1-39
CAUTION:
~
Smaller childrenand babies should alwaysbe
restrained in a child or infantrestraint. The
instructions for the restraint will saywhether it is
the right type and size for your child.A very
young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt might not staylow on the hips,as it
will likely be over the
should. Instead, the belt
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatalinjuries. So, be sure that
any child small enoughfor one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
1-40
Infants need complete support, including supportfor
the head and neck.This is necessary becausean infant’s
neck is weakand its head weighsso much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
A baby
should be secured in an
appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that manyhospitals today won’t
release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an
infant restraint availablefor the baby’s first trip in a
motor vehicle.
~~
~
~~~
~
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 124b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The babywould be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
~~
~~
~
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding ina
vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh much until a
crash. Duringa crash a baby will become so
heavy you can't hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-41
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided
by
appropriate restraints.
&= What are the different typesof add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not onlythe child’s weight and size,
but also whetheror not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which
it
will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made
for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a childon a
continuous flat surface. With an infant
car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests
toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-42
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 Ibs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in a
crash. Some infant seats come in two parts -- the
base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part
is removable.
1-43
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designedto help protect
children who are from20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and
about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up
to around four years of age. One type, a convertible
restraint, is designedto be used either as a rear-facing
infant seat or a forward-facing child seat.
1-44
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs. (1 8 to 27 kg) and about
four to eight years of age. It’s designed to improve
the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder
belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-45
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designedto be used in a vehicle.If it is, it
will have a label saying thatit meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then followthe instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use thebelt system in
your vehicle, but the child
also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chanceof personal injury.
The instructions thatcome with the infant or child
restraint will showyou how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of theseis not available, obtain a
replacement copyfrom the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in therear rather than the front seat.We at
General Motors therefore recommend thatyou put your
child restraint in arear seat outside position.Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in thefront passenger seat.
Here’s why:
1-46
f
’ A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe
seriously injured orkilled if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-force frontalair bags. This is
because the backof the rear-facingchild
restraint would be very close to the inflatingair
bag. Always secure a rear-facingchild restraint
in a rear seat outsideposition.
You may secure a forward-facingchild restraint
in the right front seat, but
before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the
child restraint in
a rear seat outside
position.
Wherever you install it, be sureto secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in
the vehicle. Be sureto properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat
positions are located on the floor in the cargo area.
Don’t use thefront set of tie-down brackets. Anchor the
top strap to the rearmost bracket on the same sideof the
vehicle as the child restraint.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in Rear
a
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructionsthat came with the child
restraint. Secure the child inthe child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’sface or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
1-48
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on
the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on thechild restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pullthe child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
To remove thechild restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Center Seat Positions (4-Door Models)
Your vehicle hasa right front passenger air bag.Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in thisseat. Here’s why:
Don’t use child restraints in these positions.The
restraints won’t work properly.
1-50
If the shoulder belt goes infront of the child’s face or
neck, putit behind thechild restraint.
A child ina rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured orkilled if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-forcefrontal air bags. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very closeto the inflatingair
bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in therear seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle hasa right front passenger air
bag, always movethe seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
(See “Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safetybelt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-51
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the
way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use
your knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all way.
the The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrownchild restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safetybelts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they needto use the
safety belts properly.
0
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out
in a crash.
0
Children who aren’t buckled upcan strike other
people who are.
1-53
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The
belt can’t properlyspread the impactforces. In a
crash, thetwo children can be crushed together
by
and seriously injured. A belt must be used
only one personat a time.
1-54
Q:
What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt,
but thechild is so small that the shoulder belt
is
very close to thechild’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center
of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still
is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sittingin a rear outside position of a
four-door model, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” in the Index. If the child isso small that
the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s
face or neck, you might want to place the child ina
seat that has alap belt, if your vehicle has one.
I
I
A CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting ina seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulderpart is behind
way, in
the child. If the child wears the belt in this
a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied
right on the
child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the
lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips,
just touching
the child’s thighs.This applies belt forceto the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-55
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you
should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight
and all your belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see
anything that might keepa safety belt system from
doing itsjob, have it repaired.
But if a safety belt isn’tlong enough tofasten, your
dealer will order youan extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be longenough for you. The extender will
be just foryou, andjust forthe seat in your vehiclethat
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for theseat it is madeto fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
1-56
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina
crash. They can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash,do you need newbelts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would beif worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
To help avoid personal
injury, belt assembly must
be replaced if this vehicle is
in a collision or if “Replace
Belt” appears below. See
Owner’s Manual for more
information.
If belts are cut or damaged, replacethem. Collision
damage also may mean you will needto have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessaryeven if the belt wasn’t being usedat
the time of the collision.
If an air baginflates, you’ll need toreplace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
If you ever see alabel on
the driver’s or the right
front passenger’s safety
belt that says to replace the
belt, be sure to do so. Then
the new belt will be there
to help protect you in a
collision. You would see
this label on the belt near
the door opening.
1-57
&
1-58
NOTES
Section 2 FeaturesandControls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on yourvehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systemsthat tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-9
2- 12
2- 12
2-13
2- 14
2- 16
2-17
2- 18
2-2 1
2-22
2-23
2-26
2-27
2-27
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless EntrySystem (If Equipped)
EndgateLiftgate
Theft
Passlock@
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (IfEquipped)
Automatic TransmissionOperation
Manual Transmission Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission Only)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-3 1
2-33
2-33
2-34
2-40
2-43
2-44
2-46
2-57
2-57
2-58
2-59
2-60
2-64
2-65
2-68
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Windows
Horn
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
Turn SignaVMultifunctionLever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays andCigarette Lighter
Sun Visors
Accessory Power Outlets(If Equipped)
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Universal Transmitter(If Equipped)
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages andIndicators
2-1
Keys
A CAUTION:
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured
or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
1
2-2
I
I
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for
the ignition, endgate,
spare tire lock
(two-door vehicles)
and door locks. It will
fit with either side up.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keepthis number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be ableto have
new ones madeeasily using this number. Your selling
dealer should also have this number.
I NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot o
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside.You may even have to damage
So be sure you have
your vehicle to get in.
extra keys.
-
-
-
2-3
You can use the Keyless EntrySystem, if you have
Door Locks
this option.
You can use yourkey to unlock your doorfrom
the outside.
Unlocked doors canbe dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door
is
locked, the inside handlewon’t open it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through anunlocked
door when you slow down or stop your
vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, andyou will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
--
There are several waysto lock and unlock your vehicle.
2-4
To lock your door fromthe inside, slide the lever on
your inside doordown.
To unlock the door,slide the
lever on your inside door
up. You will see a red area
on the lever.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
Rear Door SecurityLock (If Equipped)
With this feature, you can
lock the rear doorsso they
can’t be opened from the
inside by passengers.
Move the lock upto lock
the doors and downto
release the door locks.
Lockout Prevention
If your vehicle has power doorlocks, the switch is
located on the armrest. Remove the ignition key and
press LOCK to lock all the doors at once.
To protect you from locking your keyin the vehicle, this
feature stops the powerdoor locks from locking when
the keys are in the ignition and adoor is open.
To unlock the doors, press the raised area nextto the
key symbol.
If the power lock switchis pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition,all the doors will lock and
the driver’s door will unlock.
On four-door models, thelever on each rear door works
only that door’s lock.
2-5
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and setthe locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Keyless Entry System(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has thisoption, you can lock and unlock
your doors and rearendgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up
to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with yourvehicle.
Your keyless entry systemoperates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that maycause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesiredoperation of
the device.
2-6
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized servicefacility could voidauthorization to
use this equipment.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not workor if you have
to stand closer to your vehiclefor the transmitter to
work, try this:
0
Check to determine if battery replacementor
resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
0
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
0
Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be
blocking the signal. Takea few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and tryagain.
0
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technicianfor service.
Operation
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
When you press UNLOCK, the driver’sdoor will
unlock automatically, the parking lamps will flash and
the interior lights will go on. If you press UNLOCK
again within three seconds, the remaining doors will
unlock, the parking lamps will flash and the interior
lights will go on. Press LOCK to lock all the doors.
Press LOCK again withinthree seconds and the horn
will chirp.
Each remote keyless entrytransmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Rememberto bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. Whenthe dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle canhave only four transmitters
matched to it.
Press the REAR button twice within three seconds to
unlock the rearliftgate glass, the parking lamps will
flash and the interior lights will go on. If your vehicle
has an automatic transmission, the transmission
must be inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If your
vehicle has a manual transmission, you must engage
the parking brake.
Remote Panic Alarm
When the button with the horn symbol onthe key
transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the
headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again,
waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use,the battery in yourremote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehiclebefore the transmitter works,
it’s probablytime to change the battery.
2-7
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry.Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter:
1. Insert a dime in theslot between the covers of the
transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove
the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery,positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers andsnap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5 . Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due tothe security
method used by this system.The transmitter does not
send the samesignal twice to the receiver.The receiver
will not respondto a signal it has been sent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close
to your
vehicle and press and hold the
LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter at the
same time for seven
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
2-8
EndgateLiftgate
Endgate-Mounted Spare
If your vehicle hasan endgate-mounted spare tire
carrier, you must move thecarrier arm outof the way to
open the glass.
It can be dangerous to drive
with the rear
window, endgate or liftgate open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drivewith the rearwindow, endgate
or liftgate openor if electrical wiringor other
cable connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the
rear window, endgate
or liftgate:
Make sure all windows are shut.
lhrn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting on
VENT. That will force outside air into your
vehicle. See 6 4 C ~Controls’’
~ 0 ~in theIndex.
If you have air outletson or under the
instrument panel, open them
all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Here’s how to move the arm:
1. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm.
2. Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate. You
may need to give it a slight tug.
3. To latch the carrier arm, swing it toward the endgate.
2-9
EndgateLiftgate Release
To open a mechanical lock systemfrom the outside,
insert the key into the lock and turn itto the left to
unlock theglass.
I
Reach inside the endgate to
lift the handle and open
The endgate and glass willautomatically lock
when shut.
To open a power lock systemfrom the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn
to the left. All doors
will unlock.
You may also use the keyless entry system, or the power
door locks, if you’re vehicle is so equipped.
When doors are unlocked,
press the buttonto open
the glass.
2-10
The endgate can be opened withouta key if the driver’s
door is unlocked. Theendgate glass will not releaseif
the vehicleis in gear.
To lock a power lock systemfrom the outside, insert the
key into the lock button andturn to the right. All doors
will lock.
Remote Rear Glass Release
1
This button on the
passenger’s side of the
steering column allows you
to release the rear glass
so equipped. Use the handle to open the liftgate. Press
the button to openthe glass when the liftgate is closed.
The glass won’t release if the vehicle is in gear.
Emergency Release for Opening
EndgateLiftgate
1. Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the
access hole in the trim panel.
1
If your vehicle hasan automatic transmission, your shift
lever must be in PARK(P) or NEUTRAL (N) for the
release to work.
If you have a manual transmission, either with or
without the Keyless Entry option, you must apply your
parking brake or have the ignition off before you can
open the endgateglass.
Liftgate Release
Insert the key in the lock button and turn tothe left. All
doors will unlock. You may also use the power lock
switches or the Keyless EntrySystem, if your vehicle is
1 2.
Use a thin screwdriver
to reach through the
access holes in boththe
trim panel andthe
hardware cover.
Pry the release lever
toward the passenger’s
side untilthe glass latch
pops open.
3. Reattach the carpet securely.
2-11
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially insome cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we puton itcan makeit
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
If you park in alot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s bestto lock it up and take your keys.
But what ifyou have to leave your ignition key? What if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy targetfor joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Passlock@
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you
to remove your key
from the ignition and takeit with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, andso will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking
your key outalso locks your transmission. And
remember to lock the doors.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system.The system
is armed once the key is removed from the ignition.
Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder
is
turned with a valid key.
If a correct key is not used,fuel
is disabled.
Parking at Night
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go
off after the engine is started.
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Rememberto keep your valuables out of
sight.
Put them in a storage area,or take them withyou.
2-12
If the enginestalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing
before trying to restart the engine.Remember to release
the key from theSTART position as soon as the
engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three (3) tries, the
vehicle needs service.
If you are driving and the SECURITY light comes on,
you will beable to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock system is not
working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.
You may also want to check the fuse(see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index). Seeyour dealer
for service.
If the SECURITY light flashes, wait until the light stops
flashing before starting the engine.
If the SECURITY light comes on while the engine is
running, a problem has been detected and the system
may need service. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” Butit will perform better in thelong
run if you follow these guidelines:
a Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for thefirst 500 miles (805 km).
0 Don’t drive at any
one speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time
your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline
every
time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for
more information.
--
--
2-13
Ignition Positions
NOTICE:
Use the key to turn the ignition switchto five
different positions.
Don’t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY
position for long periods of time. Prolonged
operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY
position could drain your battery and prevent
you from starting your vehicle.
C
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’sa theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.
A
PLCCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things
-
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked,
just asit was
before you inserted the key.
2-14
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel.Use OFF if you must have
your vehicle in motion while
the engine is off (for
example, if your vehicleis being towed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.
’ A CAUTION:
On manual transmissionvehicles, turning thekey
to LOCK will lock the steering column and result
in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key only
to OFF. Don’t press thekey release button while
the vehicle is moving.
I NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sureyou are using the correctkey; if
so, is it all theway in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
key hard. But turn thekey only with your hand.
Using a tool to force itcould break thekey or the
ignition switch.If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Key Release Button
The kev, cannot be removed
from the ignitionof manual
transmission vehicles
unless the key release
To remove the keyon manual transmission vehicles,
turn the key to OFF. Then turn the keyto LOCK while
pressing the keyrelease button down at the same time.
Pull the key straightout.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key
to
LOCK and pull it straight out.
2-15
Retained AccessoryPower
Manual Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped witha Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)feature which will allowcertain features
of your vehicleto continue to work upto 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turnedto OW.
The gear selector shouldbe in NEUTRAL (N) and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the
clutch pedal to the
floor and start theengine. Your vehicle won’t start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down-- that’s a
safety feature.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof and
overhead
console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or
ACCESSORY. Once the keyis turned from RUN to
OFF,these features will continue to work for up to
20 minutes or until a door is opened.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
engine gets warm.
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position-- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t tryto shift toPARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2-16
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your keyin
START. If it doesn’tstart in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, unless it starts sooner.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates.Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see,
the partof this manual thattells howto do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, behind the underhood fuse block.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt AC outlet.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electricalshock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather, 0°F (- 1 SOC) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should beplugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
2-17
How long should you keepthe coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends onthe outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that youcontact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your automatic transmission may havea shift lever
located on theconsole between the seats or on the
steering column.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
If your vehicle is equipped witha column shift lever, it
features an electronic shift position indicator within the
instrument cluster.This display must be powered
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of
PARK (P). This means that if your key is inOFF, but
not locked, there will bea small current drain on your
battery which coulddischarge your battery overa period
of time. If you need to leave your key in the ignition in
OFF for an extended period, itis recommended that you
disconnect the battery cable from the batteryto prevent
discharging your battery.
2-18
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels.It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
It is dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if the
shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift leverto PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in theIndex. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a nailer’’ in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has a
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to
fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
(press the button in on the console shift lever) as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever
into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)”
in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R)
while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R)only after
your vehicle is stopped.
To rock yourvehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only.
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running
at high speed)is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or
objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused
by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-19
DRIVE (D): This position is fornormal driving. If you
need more powerfor passing, andyou’re:
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lowerfuel economy) than SECOND(2). You can
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfwaydown.
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snowor mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST(1) while the vehicleis
moving forward, the transmission won’t shiftinto
FIRST (1) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
@
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRTVE @) should not be used when towinga trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for
off-road driving. SelectTHIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
THIRD (3): This positionis also used for normal
driving, howeverit offers more power and lower
fuel
economy than DRIVE (D).You should use THIRD(3)
when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on
steep hills or winding roads or for off-road driving.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can helpcontrol your speed as
you go downsteep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use your brakesoff and on.
You can alS0 use SECOND(2) for starting your vehicle
from a stop on slippery roadsurfaces.
2-20
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand ormud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
vehicle there with only the acceleratorpedal. This
could overheat and damage the transmission.
Use
your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your
vehicle in position ona hill.
Manual Transmission Operation
slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
5-Speed
THIRD, FOURTHAND FIFTH (3,4 and 5): Shift
into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up onthe
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
I
This is your shift pattern.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the br
pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutchpedal
and the brake pedal, and shift toNEUTRAL (N).
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
Here’s how tooperate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (30 k d h ) . If you’ve cometo a complete
stop and it’s hardto shift into FIRST (I), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let upon the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST ( 1).
SECOND (2):Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then,
REVERSE (R):To back up, press the clutch pedal, wait
about six seconds, then shift into REVERSE (R). Then
let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
I NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R)only after your vehicle is
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) whileyour
vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for
parking your vehicle.
2-2-
Shift Light
A
If you have a manual
transmission, you have a
SHIFT light.
SHIFT
This light will show you when toshift to the next higher
gear for best fuel economy.
When this light comeson, you can shift to the next
higher gearif weather, road andtraffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when e light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if youquickly change the positionof the
accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.
2-22
' A CAUTION:
I
I
If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, you could lose controlof your vehicle.
And you could injure yourself or others. Don't shift
down more than one gear when you downshift.
If your vehicle has four-wheeldrive and is equipped
with a manual transmission, disregardthe shift light
when the transfer case is in 4LO.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal
down with your rightfoot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with yourleft foot. If the ignition is on, the brake
system warninglight will come on.
To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake
pedal down.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever. It is located on the
bottom of the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake
on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat.
You may have to
replace them, andyou could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
It can be dangerousto get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
Always put theshift lever fully in PARK (P)with
the parking brakefirmly set. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Tkailer” in theIndex.
2-23
Column Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal downwith your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position
like this:
Move the lever up asfar as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle withthe key, your vehicleis in
PARK (P).
Pull the lever toward you.
2-24
Console Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Autom ’ic Transmission C dy)
~
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
It can be dangerous to leave your
vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmlyset. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or otherscould
be injured. Don’tleave your vehicle with the
engine runningunless you have to.
Hold in the button on the lever.
Push the lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key andtake it with you. If you can leave
your vehicle with the key, your vehicle isPARK
in (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK
(P) and your
parking brake is firmlyset before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift leverinto PARK (P),hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see
if you can move the
shift lever away fromPARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you (or pressing the button ona console shift
lever). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
fully locked into PARK (P).
2-25
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you cannot shift out ofPARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever-- push the shift leverall the way into
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t
shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much
force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into the gear you want (you must press the
shift lever button if you have the console shift lever.)
When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
If torque lock does occur,you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill
to take someof the
pressure fromthe parking pawl in the transmission,so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park(P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Your vehicle has a Brake-TransmissionShift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brake
before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition is
in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission Operation” in
the Index.
2-26
If you ever hold the brake pedal
down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake untilthe end of Step 4.
4. Start the vehicle and thenshift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soonas you can.
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission Models Only)
Before you get out of your vehicle, turn off your engine,
put your manual transmission inREVERSE (R) and
firmly apply the parking brake.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicleis pulling
a trailer, see “Towinga Trailer” in the Index.
F rking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Things that can burn
could touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers,leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
I
~
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains thegas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in acollision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
I
2-27
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if
ever you have to, here are some things to know.
Idling the engine with the air system control off
could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle
(see the earlier Caution under“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in aclosed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide(CO) into yourvehicle even if
the fanswitch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come ineasily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.(See
“Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
2-28
--
It can be dangerous get
to out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured.To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper stepsto be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
-
cking Rear Axle(If Equipped)
11 you have this feature, your locking rear axle can give
you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or
gravel. It works like a standard axle most of thetime,
but when one of the rear wheels hasno traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move thevehicle.
Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your four-wheel-drive
vehicle has the electronic
transfer case, the transfer
case switches are above the
radio controls.
Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to allfour wheels for extra
traction. To shift out of two-wheel drive and into
four-wheel drive, push the 4HI or 4LO button on the
transfer case switch. You should use 2HI for most
normal driving conditions.
NOTICE:
Driving in the4HI or 4LO positions for a long
time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the
life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.
Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among three driving settings:
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. When this lamp is lit, it is about
one-half as bright as the others.
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help
drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.
2-29
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give
you extra traction. You may never need4LO. It sends
the maximum power to all four wheels. You might
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud
or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will comeon briefly when
you turn on the ignition andone will stay on. If the lights
do not come on, you should take your vehiclein for
service. An indicator light will flashwhile shifting. It will
remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI
Press and release the 4HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically.
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be doneat
any speed, and thefront axle will unlock automatically.
Shifting from 2HIor 4HI to 4LO
To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4L0, the vehicle mustbe
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 kmh) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped
2-30
with an automatic transmissionor the clutch pedal
engaged in vehicles equipped witha manual
transmission. The preferred methodfor shifting into
4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch.
You must wait for the 4LOindicator light to stop
flashing and remain illuminatedbefore shifting your
transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicleis in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and notcomplete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slower than3 mph (4.8 k m h ) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N)or the clutch
pedal engaged.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles,if your
transfer case does not shift into 4L0, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N),press and release the
4LO switch. While the 4LOindicator light is flashing,
shift your transmissioninto PARK (P). Waituntil the
4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get youinto 4L0,
but you should take your vehicle in
for service to restore
normal operation.
Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or ZHI, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 k d h ) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal
engaged. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO
is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2
km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch. You must wait
for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashingand remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear
or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicleis in gear
and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle
is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 kmh) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch
pedal engaged.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case doesnot shift into 4H1, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4HI switch. While the 4HI indicator light is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4H1,
but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.
Windows
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your
manual side door windows.
Power Windows (If Equipped)
If you have the optional power windows, thecontrols
are on each of the side doors. With power windows, the
switches control the windows whenthe ignition is on or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)is present. (See
“Retained Accessory Power” inthe Index.) The driver’s
door has a switch for thepassenger windows as well.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows you to lower it without holding the
window switch. Hold the driver’s window switch down
for more than half a secondto activate the express-down
feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the window
slightly. The express-downfeature can be interrupted at
any timeby pressing the up arrowend of the switch.
Lockout Switch
Press the side of the switch with the down arrow
to
lower the window.
Press the side of the switch with the up arrow
to raise
the window.
2-32
Four-door vehicles have a lockoutfeature to prevent
passengers from operating power windows. It is located
on the driver’s door. Press
LOCK to activate this
feature. Press NORM and the windows returnto
normal operation.
Swing-Out Windows (2-Door Only)
... ...
..,.. ... .
.a&:.
,
your
vehicle
If
has rear
swing-out windows, unlatch
them at their clasps and
push out on the glass to
open them.
When you close the window, be sure the latch catches.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the hornsymbols on the
steering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
If you have the tilt steering
wheel, you shouldadjust
the steering wheel before
you drive.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room whenyou enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheelto a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust thesteering wheel while driving.
2-33
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal hastwo upward (for right) andtwo
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
LL
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When theturn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flashin the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left sideof the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
WindshieldWipers
WindshieldWasher
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
2-34
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrowstarts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will returnby
itself when yourelease it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t
flash but just stay on,a signal bulb maybe burned out
and other drivers won’t see yourturn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse(see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiringfor
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash
even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front
and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they
are working.
-7
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beamto high or high
to low, pull themultifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel will
also be on.
Signal On Chime
l r your turn signal is left onror more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.
2-35
Windshield Wipers
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further,to HI. To stop the wipers, move
the band to the OFF position.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them.If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your bladesdo become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever.
To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle.
The
wipers will clear the window and theneither stop or
return to your preset speed.
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the bandto MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, thenlet go. The wipers will
stop afterone wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed
for a long or short delay
between wipes. This canbe very useful in light rainor
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.The
closer to LO, the shorter the delay,
2-36
In freezing weather, don’t use
your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking
your vision.
I
Rear Window WasherWiper
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
1
I
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the switch to either LO
or HI. To turn the wiper off, slide the switch to OFF.
1 With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping yourfoot
on the accelerator. This can
really help on longtrips.
Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about
If you have an automatic transmission and you apply
your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
To wash the window, press the wash button located on
the switch. The switch must be in either LO or HI.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However,the rearwindow
washer will runout of fluid before the windshield
washer. If you can wash your windshield but not your
rear window, check your fluid level.
2-37
If you have a manual transmission and you apply your
brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise control will
Setting Cruise Control
shut off.
I
CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you
can’t drivesafely at a steadyspeed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on
winding
roads or inheavy traffic.
Cruise control canbe dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause
needless wheel
spinning, andyou could lose control. Don’t
use cruise controlon slippery roads.
I
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise controlswitch on when
you’re not using cruise,you might hita button
and go into cruisewhen you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise controlswitch off until you want to use it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-38
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at adesired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need toreset it.
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise
control switch from ON
to R/A for about a half
a second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Remember, if you holdthe switch at R/A longer than
half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at WA.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
0
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the button at the end of the lever, thenrelease
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise atthe higher speed.
0
Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it
there until you get up tothe speed you want, and
then release the switch. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to WA. Each
time you do this, your vehicle willgo about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.)
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Press in the button at the endof the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, thenrelease it.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the
button for less than halfa second. Each time youdo
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Contro
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
2-39
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may wantto step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down.Of course, applying the brake
takes you outof cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on
steep hills.
0
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
0
Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transmission.
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing SpeedMemory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory iserased.
DOME OVERRIDE
Your parking lamp and headlamp switch on
is the
driver’s sideof your instrument panel.
Rotate the knob to the right to the parking lamps symbol
to manually turn on:
0
2-40
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Rotate the knob to the right to the master lamps symbol
to turn on all the lamps listed as wellas the headlamps.
Rotate the knob all theway to the left to turn off your
lamps and putthe system in auto headlamp mode.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turnon your headlamps at the
normal brightness along withother lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights willalso be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensoron the top
of the instrument panel under theradio speaker grill so
be sure it is not covered, which will cause the system to
be on wheneverthe ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, a tunnelor fueling your vehicle in a low-light
area. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime an
nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems
so that driving
under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not
affect the system. TheDRL and automatic headlamp
system will only be affected when the light sensor seesa
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition
is
off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brak
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you needit.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps
or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To turn the chime
off, turn the knob all the wayto the left or turn the
instrument panel dimmer downto the fully dimmed
position. In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn of
once the ignition keyis in OFF.
2-41
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps(DIU) can make it easier for
others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they canbe especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and beforesunset.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come
on at
reduced brightness when:
0
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp
mode and
the parking brake is released.
When the DRLare on, only your headlamps will beon.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on.
The instrument panel won’tbe lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
When you turn the headlamp switchoff, the regular lamps
will go off, and your headlamps will change to the reduced
brightness of DRL provided it is not dark outside.
2-42
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the
parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system whenyou need it.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Use yourfog lamps for better vision in foggyor misty
conditions. Your parking lamps mustbe on for your fog
lamps to work.
The fog lamp switchis on the instrument panel under
the lamps switch. Press the switch
to turn the fog lamps
on. Press the switch againto turn them off.A light will
glow in the switch when the fog lamps
are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone willnot give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in
the dark without turningon your headlamps.
Fog lamps willgo off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beamsgo off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
Interior Lamps
Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
Brightness Control
Press the button near eachlamp on the overhead console
to turn the reading lamps on andoff. The lamps can be
swiveled to point in thedesired direction.
Turn the switch next to the headlamp switch up to make
your instrument panel lights brighter. Turnthe switch all
the way up to turn on the interior lamps.
If you have the mini-console, press the lens on each
lamp to turn it on or off.
Exit Lighting
Front Map Lamps(If Equipped)
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition to help you see
while exiting the vehicle. These lights will stay on for a
short period of time and then willgo out.
If your vehicle has optional front map lamps, they are
located on the inside rearview mirror. They will
automatically come on for approximately40 seconds when
the doors are unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped) or until the ignition key is turned to RUN or
ACCESSORY. The lamps willalso stay on for
approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle unless
you lock the doors with the keyless entry transmitter.
Illuminated Entry
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated
entry feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is out. When
all the doors are closed, or the frontdoor handles are
lifted and released, the lamps will stay on for ashort
period of time and will then go out. When the
DOME OVERRIDE buttonis pressed in, the
lamps will go out immediately.
You can also turn the lamps on and offby pressing the
switch near each lamp.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will comeon when you open the doors.
You can also turn the dome lamps on byrotating the
thumb wheel, located next to the parking/headlamps
knob, all theway up to the top detent position. In this
position, the dome lamps will remain on whetherthe
doors are opened or closed.
2-43
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the parkingheadlamp knob, to setthe dome
lamps to come on automatically when the doorsare
opened, or to remain off. To turn the lampsoff, press the
button once. With the button inthis position, the dome
lamps will remainoff when the doors are open.To
return the lamps to automatic operation, press the button
again and return itto the ‘‘OU~”
position. With the button
in this position, the domelamps will come on when you
open the door. This will notoverride the illuminated
entry feature.
Mirrors
Electrochromic Daymight Inside
Rearview Mirror
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity,
reading, glove box and underhood lampsif they are left
on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off.
This will keep your battery from running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, to return to normal operationit may be
necessary to:
0
Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
Turn the ignition key to RUN.
2-44
Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic
dayhight rearview mirror.
This mirror automatically changesto reduce glare from
headlamps behind you.A photocell on the backof the
mirror senses when it is becomingdark outside. Another
photocell builtinto themirror surface senses when
headlamps are behind you.
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a
few seconds). The mirror will
return
to its clear daytime
state when the glare is reduced.
Power Remote Control Mirror
The control is located on the
driver’s door armrest.
Press the button at the base of the mirror to turn on the
automatic feature. Thebutton has an indicator light to
show it is on. Press the button again to turn the
automatic feature off.
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a timedelay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from thenight back to
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of
the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
Cleaning the Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the
photocells when necessary.
Move the upper control to the left or right to cl. )se me
mirror, then pressthe arrows on the control paa IO adjust
the mirror.
Outside Manual AdjustMirror
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side
of your vehicle.
You can fold them before entering a car wash. Pullthe
mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the mirrors back out
when finished.
2-45
Convex Outside Mirror
Storage Compartments
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curvedso you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
Glove Box
1
4
To open your glove box, lift the lever
on the front of the
glove box and lower the door.The glove box should not
beopenwhile driving.
OverheadConsole (If Equipped)
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Heated Outside Rearview Mirror
(If Equipped)
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
The overhead console includes reading lamps, a
also warms the heated outside mirrorsto help clear them
compartment for a garage door opener, a temperature
of ice and snow. See “Rear Window Defogger’’ inthe
and
compass display and a storage compartment
Index for more information.
for sunglasses.
2-46
Reading Lamps
Press the button near each
lamp to turn the reading
lamps on and off.
To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the latchforward.
Peel the protective
backing from thehook
and loop patch.
t
The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the
desired direction.
Installing a Garage Door Opener
If you have a garage door opener,the front overhead
compartment can be used toconveniently store
the opener.
Press it firmlyto the back of your garage door opener, as
close to the center of the opener as possible.
Center the garage door opener activation button over
the console door button and press theopener firmly
into place.
If you have the optional universal transmitter, please see
“Universal Transmitter” in the Index for instructions on
how to use the system.
2-47
The pegs inside the
compartment door are used
to make surethe button on
the compartmentdoor will
contact the control button
on the garage door opener.
Add one peg at a time until the garagedoor opener
operates with the compartment door closed when you
press the button.
2-48
Now, with the compartment
door closed, press the
button again to makesure
the garage door opener
operates properly.
With the garage door opener positioned properly and the
right number of pegs in place, you should only have to
press the button slightly to operate the opener. Adjust the
position of the garage door opener and add or remove
pegs, as needed, until the opener operates properly.
Temperature and Compass Display
Before you turn on the ignition and move thevehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on.
If the outside temperature is 37 OF (3 "C) or lower when
you turn on the ignition, ICE will appear on the display.
This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may
be icy, andthat appropriate precautions should be taken.
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need tobe
manually set. However, when your vehicle is new, the
compass may function erratically.If it does, CAL
(Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the
problem, drive in a complete 360" circle three times,
and the compass will function normally.
The outsideair temperature and the compass are
displayed at the frontof the overhead console. The
control switches are located to the left of the display.
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can begreat enough to cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
the variancefor your particular location:
Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF
switch. Display the temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric) by pressing the
USMET switch.
2-49
3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the
display. When it does, release both buttons.
4. Press USNET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set.
Driver Information System (If Equipped)
This system displays the outside air temperature,
compass direction andtrip information inthe
overhead console.
1. Find your location on the zone map. Note your
zone number.
2. Press and hold boththe ON/OFF and the USMET
switches. The display will go off.
2-50
USMET: The USNET (United Statedmetric) button
allows you to switchthe display between the English
and metric system.
MODE: The MODE button can be used to toggle
between three modes of operation: OFF,COMPREMP
and TRIP.
OFF: This button turns the systemoff.
COMPEEMP: The display providesthe outside
temperature and oneof eight compass readingsto
indicate the direction the vehicleis facing.
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on. If the outside
temperature is 37°F (3°C)or lower, the display will
toggle between the word ICE andthe current
temperature every eight seconds. This is a warning to
the driver that road conditions may be icy, andthat
appropriate precautions should be taken.
The compass is self-calibrating7so it does not needto be
manually set. However, if C (Calibration) is displayed,
the compass will need to becalibrated. You may also
place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing
and holding the MODE and USMET buttons
simultaneously while in the COMPREMPmode. After
about 10 seconds, the compass will display C and you
can release the buttons. Drive the vehicle in a complete
360" circle three times at a speed of less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), and the compass will function normally. Once
the calibration is complete, the display will return to a
compass reading.
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can be great enoughto cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
the variance for your particular location:
1. Find your location on the zone mapearlier in this
section. Note your zone number.
2. Press and hold both the MODE and the
USMET
buttons in the COMP/TEMP mode.
3. After five seconds, the compass will acknowledge
the variation mode by displaying the current zone
number. When itdoes, release both buttons.
4. Press USMET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press MODE toenter your zone number. Your
variance is nowset and the display willreturn to the
COMP/TEMP mode.
2-51
TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, pressing theMODE
button will step you through the followingTRIP functions:
0 AVG ECON: The average fuel economy since the
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
last reset is displayed.
INST ECON: Instantaneous fuel economy for the
last second of driving is displayed.
RANGE: The display indicates the estimated
distance that can betravelled with the remainingfuel
in the tank, based on the fuel economy for the last
few hoursof driving.
FUEL USED: The fuel used since the 1ast.resetis
displayed.
AVG SPEED: The average speed since the last reset
is displayed.
To reset the trip computer, press theMODE and US/MET
buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds. All
functions will be displayed for halfa second once the
system is reset. Resetcan only be performed in the AVG
ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes. All three
modes are reset simultaneously.
2-52
The console has a sunglasses storage compartment.
You will find a storage compartment on eachof the
front doors.
Four-door models havestorage pockets and cupholders
on rear doors.
Front Storage Area
If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
the frontlever while lifting the top to open it. You can
store cassettes in the slots in the front of the
compartment. If you have a compact disc player, you
may store compact discs inside the console.
If your vehicle hasthe center armrest compartment, lift
the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots
for cassettes and a coinholder.
2-53
Convenience Net(If Equipped)
The convenience net is anchoredto the endgate door.
Attach the upperloops to the retainers oneither side of
the endgate opening(the label should bein the upper
passenger side corner, visiblefrom the rear of vehicle).
Attach the lower hooksto the rear cargo tie downs on
the floor.
I
Roll-Up Cargo Cover(If Equipped)
If you have the optional cargo cover, you can
use it to
cover items in the cargo area
of your vehicle.
Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the posts
into the sockets on the inside trim panelon the
passenger’s side of the vehicle to secure it.
may have a convenience net in the rear
of your
vehicle to help keep smallitems, like gloves and light
clothing in place during sharp turns
or quick stops
and starts.
IOU
The net is not designed to retain these items during
off-road use. The netis not for larger, heavieritems.
2-54
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver.You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it
outside of the vehicle. When you put
it back,
always be sure that itis securely reattached.
Luggage Carrier (Option)
Cargo Tie Downs
There are four cargo tie
downs in the rear that allow
you to strap cargo in and
keep it from moving inside
the vehicle.
If you try to carry something on top
of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than theluggage
carrier like paneling,plywood, a mattress, and
so forth the wind can catchit as you drive
along. This can causeyou to lose control. What
you are carryingcould be violently torn off, and
this could causeyou or other drivers to have a
collision, and of course damage yourvehicle. You
may be able to carry something like this
inside.
But, never carry something longer or wider tha
the luggage carrier on topof your vehicle.
--
--
The luggage carrier has slats, side rails and crossrails
attached to the roof to secure cargo.The adjustable tie
downs, at either endof the crossrails, shouldbe used to
secure loads to the luggage carrier.
Use GM accessory racks thatare compatible with your
luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment. These
are available through yourGM dealer.
2-55
rou can adjust the crossrails to handle loadsof various
sizes. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the
crossrail and move them to where youwant them. Make
sure both sides of the crossrails are even, then tighten
the slider knobs.
Be sure the cargo is properlyloaded. Follow
these guidelines:
Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is
not recommended.
Tie the load to the tie down (ateither end of
the crossrails). When loading cargo directly on
the roof panel, usethe crossrails to keepthe load
from shifting.
NOTICE:
Loading cargo thatweighs more than200 lbs.
(91 kg) onthe luggage carrier may damage your
vehicle. When you carry large things, never
let
them hang over the rear or the sides
of your
vehicle. When loading cargo on the
roof panel, be
sure it restson the slats anddoes notscratch or
damage thevehicle.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it
securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main
weight as far forward asyou can andmove the
rear crossrail forward as farpossible
as
to keep
the load from shifting.
If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as possible. Tie the load to the tie downs
provided. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie
the load so tightly thatthe crossrails or side rails
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
are damaged.
loading your vehicle. For more information
on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
To prevent damage orloss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to makesure the luggagecarrier and
cargo are still securelyfastened.
2-56
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Rotate the front ashtray door down to open it.
I NOTICE:
I
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
NOTICE:
back away from the heating element
when it’s
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into ready. That can make it overload, damaging the
lighter and the heating
element.
your ashtray.If you do, cigarettes or other
smoking materialscould set them on fire
causing damage.
Four-door vehicles havesmaller ashtrays inside the rear
doors. Press PUSH to turn the ashtrayaround for use.
To remove the front ashtray, pullthe bin upward.
Sun Visors
~
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready,it will pop backby itself.
To block out glare, you can swing downthe top and
bottom visors (if your vehicle has one). You can also
swing the bottom visorfrom side-to-side. Your visors
may have an extension that can be pulled outfor
additional glare protection and a strap for holding small
items, such as maps.
2-57
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down andlift the cover to expose the
vanity mirror.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)
Accessory Power Outlets
(If Equipped)
If you have accessory poweroutlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment. The accessory power
outlets are located near thecenter of the vehicleon the
lower part of the instrument panel.Just remove the plug
from the outlet and followthe proper installation
instructions that are included with anyelectrical
equipment you install.
These circuits are protectedby a fuseand have
maximum current levels.
I NOTICE:
Pull the sun visor down andlift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.
2-58
When using the accessory power outlets,
maximum electrical load must not exceed
20 amps. Always turnoff any electrical
equipment when notin use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods will drain
your battery.
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Press andrelease the rear side of the button in the mini
console to openthe sunroof. You can press the forward
side of the button to close the sunroof. Once the sunroof
is closed, press the forward side of the button to open
the sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you
can pull forward to block sun rays.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition or
RAP needs to beon. See “Retained Accessory Power”
in the Index.
2-59
Universal Transmitter(If Equipped)
Full-Size Console
This transmitter allowsyou to consolidate the functions
of up to three individual hand-held transmitters. It will
operate garage doors and gates,or with the accessory
package, other devices controlled by radio frequency such
as home/offke lighting systems and
security systems.
Mini Console
.
The transmitter will learn and transmit
the frequencies
of most current transmitters andis powered by your
vehicle’s battery and charging system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-2 10 of Industry and
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Programming the Transmitter
Do not use the transmitter with any garage door opener
that does not havethe “stop and reverse” feature. This
includes any garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming!
Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1 . If you have not previously programmeda universal
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter
until the red light begins to flash rapidly
(approximately 20 seconds). Then release the
buttons. This procedure initializes the memory and
erases any previous settings for all three channels.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the
bottom surface of the universal transmitter so that
you can still see the red light.
3. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Using both hands, pressthe hand-held
transmitter button and the desired button onthe
universal transmitter.Continue to hold both buttons
through Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red light
on the universal transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid
flashing, which could take up to 90 seconds,
indicates that the universal transmitter has been
programmed. Release both buttonsonce the light
starts to flash rapidly.
2-61
If you havetrouble programming the universal
transmitter, makesure that you havefollowed the
directions exactly as described and thatthe battery in the
hand-held transmitter is notdead. If you still cannot
program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end
and try again. The universal transmitter may not work
with older garagedoor openers that do not meet current
Federal Consumer SafetyStandards. If you cannot
program the transmitter after repeated attempts, consult
your GM dealer.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter
in case you need toerase and reprogramthe
universal transmitter.
Training a Garage Openerwith a “Rolling
If you programmed the universal transmitter, but the
garage door will not open, and if your garage door opener
was manufactured after 1995, your garage door may have
a security feature that changes the “code” of your garage
door opener every time it is opened or closed.
To determine if your garage door opener has this
“rolling code” feature, press the appropriate button on
the universal transmitterthat was programmed.If the
red light flashes rapidly for one to two seconds, then
turns solid, your garage door opener has this
feature.
Operating the Transmitter
To program a garage dooropener with the rollingcode
feature, do the following:
Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal
transmitter. The redlight comes on while the signal is
being transmitted.
1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the universal
transmitter by following the steps provided under
“Programming the Transmitte?’ earlierin this section.
Note that theeffective transmission range of the
universal transmitter may differ from the hand-held
transmitter and fromone channel to another.
2. Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener
receiver. It is located near the garage door opener motor.
3. Locate the training button on the garage
door opener
receiver. The exact location and color will vary
among brands.
2-62
4. Press the training button on the garage door opener
receiver for one to two seconds.
5 . Return to your vehicle and press the programmed
button on the universal transmitter until the red light
flashes rapidly (about two seconds).
6. Release the button, then press it again to confirm it
was programmed to the garage door opener receiver.
You may now use either the universal transmitter or the
hand-held transmitter to open your garage door. If you
still have difficulty in programming andrequire
assistance, please call 1-800-355-35 15.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the redlight begins to flash.
Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
reprogrammed using theprocedure for programming the
transmitter explained earlier.
Accessories
Accessories for the universal transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please call 1-800-355-35 15.
2-63
Instrument Panel
A. Air Vents
B. Instrument Cluster
C. Electronic Transfer Case
(If Equipped)
D. Glove Box
2-64
E. Audio System
E Auxiliary Power Outlets
G . Rear Window Defogger
H. Comfort Controls
I. Ashtray
J. RearLiftgate Release
K. Rear Window Washermiper
L. Brake Release
M. Fog Lamps
N. Lamp Controls
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you knowat a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, about how much fuel you’ve used, andmany other things you’ll needto know to drive safely and economically.
Standard Cluster
2-65
2-66
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (kmh).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used inthe United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
You may wonder what happensif your vehicle needsa
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if
it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
Wip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last setthe trip odometer to zero.
To view the trip odometer, press the button near the
readout. To reset the trip odometer, hold the button until
it resets.
Tachometer (If Equipped)
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Each tachometer has a different limit depending on the
powertrain in your vehicle.The tachometer has three
areas: normal operating range, red warning range and
red danger range.
The normal operating range shows your engine speed
during normal driving conditions. For example, when
the needle points to 2, it means the engine is running at
2,000 revolutions per minute (rpm).The tachometer
needle will vary all the time that the engine is running.
The shaded red warning rangetells you that yourengine
speed is reaching its upper limits. Don’t drive very long
with the tachometer in the red warning range. If you
have a manual transmission, shift to a higher gear as
soon aspossible. If you have an automatic transmission,
lift yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.
The solid red danger rangetells you that yourengine
speed is at its upper limits. You should immediately
shift to ahigher gear,or lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
I NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red range, or engine damage will occur.
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages cansignal that something is
wrong before it becomesserious enough to cause an
expensive repairor replacement. Paying attentionto
your warning lights and gagescould also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be
or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the
engine just to let you know they’re working.If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages canindicate when there may be oris a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work togetherto let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
2-68
When one of the warning lights comes on and stayson
when you are driving, or whenone of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please followthis manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly-- and even
dangerous. So please getto know your warninglights
and gages.They’re a bighelp.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unlessthe driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds,
then it will flashfor about
55 seconds. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled,
neither thechime nor the
light willcome on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows theair bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes theair bag sensors, the air bag
module, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more
information on theair bag system, see “Air Bag” in
the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out.This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Charging System Indicator Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on whileyou are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system.It could indicate that
you have problems with a generator drive belt,
or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all youraccessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-69
Vo1’-- - --* Gage
I
When your engine is not
running, but theignition is
on (inRUN), this gage
shows your battery’sstate of
charge in DC volts.
You can only drivefor a short time with the reading in
either warning zone.If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zoneindicate a possible
problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Shift Light
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the chargingsystem. Readings betweenthe
low and high warning zonesindicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when
a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle andthe engine is leftat an idle for an
extended period.This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher
engine speeds
allow the charging system tocreate maximum power.
2-70
SHIFT
You have the shiftlight if
you have a manual
transmission. This light
comes on very brieflyas a
bulb check when you start
the engine.
Shifting when the indicator light is on will help youget
the bestfuel economy. See “Shift Light” in the Index.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight
will come on when you set your parlung brake.
The light
will stay onif your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released, it
means youhave a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake systemis divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working,the other part can
still work and stop you.For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
(0)(8>
BRAKE
This light should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key toRUN. If
it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully.You may notice thatthe pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may
go closer to the floor.
It may take longerto stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
’F--A
CAUTl IN:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident.If the lightis still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
2-71
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light willcome
on when you start your
engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes.If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.
See
“Brake System Warning Light”earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition keyto RUN. If the
light doesn’t come onthen, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-72
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature.If the
gage pointer movesinto
the red area, your engine
is
too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. you
If
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual show you what
to do. See “Engine Overheating’’ in the Index.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service
Engir
light)
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
NOTICE:
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helpingto produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice
is required. Malfunctions often willbe indicated by
the system beforeany problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, aftera while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not as
be
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could leadto costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition ison and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, haveit repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
0
Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
on your
may damage the emission control system
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service maybe required.
0
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-73
If the LightIs Flashing
The following may prevent moreserious damage to
your vehicle:
0
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recentlyput fuel into your vehicle?
Avoidinghard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, makingsure to fully install
the cap.The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel
cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with thecap properly
installed should turnthe light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauledas soon as itis possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps,and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
2-74
Did youjust drive througha deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usuallybe corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fu.el?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that mayhave developed.
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows
the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, butreadings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
2-75
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low
oil pressure.
Security Warning Light
SECURITY
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become
so hot that it
catches fire.You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Damage to yourengine from neglected oil
problems can becostly and is not covered by
your warranty.
2-76
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.The
light will stay on until the
engine starts.
If the light flashes, the Passlocksystem has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock”
in the Index.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
system. Your vehicle will not be protected bv Passlock,
and you should see your dealer.
Check Gages Light
Service 4WD Light
SERVICE
4WD
~~~
~
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, as acheck to show
you it is working.
CHECK
GAGES
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
~
The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that
there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is
also designed to assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
If the light comes on and stays on while you aredriving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
Gate Ajar Light
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine.
-
I
GATE
AJAR
If it stays on, your liftgate is ajar.Try closing the liftgate
again. Never drive with the liftgate even partially open.
2-77
The gage moves a little whenyou turn a corner or
speed up.
Fuel Gage
When the ignitionis on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have remaining.
The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
Low Fuel Light
This light comes on when
the fuel tank is low on fuel.
FUELONLY
LOW
FUEL
Here are four things that some owners
ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
At the gas station, the gas pumpshuts off before the
gage reads FULL(F).
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half
full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacityto fill
the tank.
2-78
To turn it off, add fuelto the fuel tank. See “Fuel” in
the Index.
Section 3 Cornfo-t Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3- 10
3- 10
3-10
3- 10
3-12
Comfort Controls
Standard Climate Control System
Electronic Climate Control (If Equipped)
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Defogging and Defrosting
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic
Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
3-15
3-20
3-24
3-26
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-30
3-30
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact DiscPlayer
Fixed Mast Antenna
Comfort Controls
Temperature Knob
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.
The middle knobon the control panel lets you selectthe
relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. Move theknob to the right toward
the red areafor warmer air. Move theknob to the left
toward the blue areafor cooler air.
Standard Climate Control System
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the directionof air delivery.
OFF: This setting turns the systemoff. Some outside air
will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle
is
moving forward.
I'
II
Fan Control
The knob on the left sideof the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed.To increase airflow, move
the knob to the right. To decrease airflow, moveit to
the left.
3-2
MAX A/C: This setting provides maximum cooling
with the least amountof work. MAX A/C recirculates
much of the air inside your vehicleso it cools quickly.
This setting directs most of the air through the
instrument panel vents anda small amount throughthe
floor vents.
A/C: This setting cools the air entering your vehicle and
directs most of the air through the instrument panel
vents and a small amount through the floor vents.
+e
+fl
BI-LEVEL A / C : This setting cools the air
entering your vehicle anddirects it through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
Electronic Climate Control System
(-- Equipped)
+0
fl
VENT This setting directs most of the air through
the instrument paneloutlets and a small amount through
the floor outlets. The air conditioning compressor is not
working when VENT is selected.
+
HEATER:’
This setting directs most of the
0
warmed air through the heaterfloor outlets and some air
through the windshield defroster outlets.
w. BLEND: Airflow
+
’ is divided equally between the
heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets and some through the
heater (floor) outlets.
Fan Control
The knob on the left sideof the electronic climate control
panel controls the fan speed. To manually increase airflow,
move the knob to the right.To manually decrease aifflow,
move it to the left.
OFF: If the knob isin OFF, outside air will still enter
the vehicle, and will be directed based
on the position of
the mode knob.
AUTO: If the knob isin AUTO, the fan speed will vary
as the system maintains the selected temperature.
3-3
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel letsyou select the
desired air temperature in your vehicle.
This knob will
allow you to adjust theinterior air temperature
independently of the function knob setting. Move the
knob to the right toward82 for warmer air. Move the
knob to the left toward66 for cooler air.
Full Hot: If you turn the temperature knob past82°F
(28”C), the system will go into the “full hot” mode. The
system will remain at that maximum heating setting and
the fan will blowat the speed the fan knob is setto. If
the fan is in AUTO, it will runat full speed.
-
Mode Knob Automatic Operation
The right knobon the control panel allowsyou to
choose the direction ofair delivery. When the system is
set for automatic operation, sensors will control theair
delivery mode. Air will come primarily from the
floor or
instrument panel outlets, with some
air directed to the
windshield to prevent fogging.
When the system isin AUTO mode, theair conditioning
light will turn on, and the recirculation and outsideair
lights turn off. With the system in
full auto control (both
the fan and mode knobs in AUTO), you still have the
ability to override any function. However, continually
overriding the outsideair or the A/C compressor will
limit the abilityof the system to cool the
vehicle quickly.
Full Cold: If you turn the temperature knob past66°F
(1 9”C), the system will go into the “full cold” mode.
The system will remain at that maximum coolingsetting
and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is set to. If you push a button for a function which is not
If the fan isin AUTO, it will run at full speed.
available, the light next to that button will flash three
times to alert you that it’s not available.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the
system to heat or cool any faster.
To find your comfort zone, start with the74°F (23°C)
setting and allow about20 minutes for the systemto
adjust the temperature if necessary.
3-4
With the automatic setting, the air conditioning
compressor automatically cycles when neededto cool
the air. Incold weather, whenthe system senses the need
for heat, the airflow will be directed out the floor
outlets. As the interior temperature approaches a desired
setting, the blower speed willdecrease. To maintain
interior comfort, the airflow willadjust between the
instrument panel air outlets and floor outlets. On bright
sunny days incool weather, the airflow maycome out of
the air conditioning and floor outlets (bi-level mode) to
maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness.
To avoid blowingcold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the outside air
temperature, engine coolant temperature or the time
since the engine was last started. As the coolant warms
up, the blower fan speed will graduallyincrease and air
will flow from the heater outlets, with some airflow to
the windshield to prevent fogging under most
normal conditions.
If your vehicle is sitting out on a warm day and you
have the fanset on AUTO, the air will first flow out of
the floor air outlets for a few seconds. That is normal.
This is to expel hot air from the air outlets. As the air is
cooled, the airflow will move throughthe air
conditioning outlets.
Be careful not to put anything overthe solar sensor
located around the center of the instrument panel.
This sensor is used bythe automatic system to
regulate temperature.
-
Mode Knob Manual Operation
The right knob on the control panel allows youto
choose the direction of air delivery.
You can choose to set the climate control system
operations yourself, or let the system workfor you
by placing the system in AUTO mode.
See “Mode
Knob - Automatic Operation” earlier in this section.
+.
+.
+H
fl
PANEL: This setting directs most of the air
through the instrument paneloutlets and a small amount
through thefloor outlets.
BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
e
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air throughthe heater floor outlets and some
air throughthe windshield defroster outlets.
+’
3-5
w.
+HBLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the
heater flooroutlet and the windshield defroster outlets.
The air conditioningcompressor may run to dehumidify
the air to prevent window fogging.
DEFROST This setting directs most air through
the windshield defrosteroutlets and some throughthe
heater outlets. The air conditioning compressor may run
to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
a
OUTSIDE AIR:Press this button toforce the
system to use outside air. Pressit again to closeoff the
outside air.
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR buttonwill cancel the
RECIRCULATION button.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit
the amountof fresh airentering your vehicle.This is
helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your
vehicle. In the AUTO mode, thesystem will use
recirculation as necessaryto cool the air. Pressing the
recirculation button will change the operation toa
manual mode and theair will recirculate non-stop. Press
this button again to turn
off the recirculation feature.
3-6
RECIRCULATION may be selectedwith the fan control
in OFF to limit odors, outsideair and dust from entering
your vehicle.
Pressing the RECIRCULATION buttonwill cancel the
OUTSIDE AIR button.
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify theair
inside the vehiclewhen the A/C light is on.
Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
the outside temperaturedrops below a level which air
conditioning is ineffective.
Remember thatin order for the automatic system
to perform
well, it needs A/C to provide cooling performance.
Air Conditioning
Heating
On hot days, open the windows long enough
to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the timeit takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
The heater works bestif you keep your windows closed
while using it. On cold days,use HEATER with the
temperature knob turnedto the right. BLEND is useful
in cool weather whenyou have fog or ice on the
windshield or side windows.
For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX
A/C
with the temperature knob turnedto the left. This setting
should be used to keep odors and/or dust from entering
the vehicle. For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C
with the temperature knob turnedto the left.
On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Climate
Control system, this same performance can be achieved
as long as the A/C is enabled and the outside
air button
is not active.
On cool but sunny days, useBI-LEVEL A/C to deliver
warm air tothe floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets.
When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes in your vehicle’sengine speed and
power. This is normal becausethe system is designed
to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the
desired temperature.
If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting your engine, your heating system will produce
warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartmentin
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures whenlittle heating or
cooling is needed, useVENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Airflow is through the instrument
panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outsideair to
the inside of your vehicle whenit is moving. When the
vehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flow
through by selecting any mode and any fan speed.
3-7
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free
of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (suchas leaves). The heater
and defroster will work
far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, move the
fan controlto high for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
You will find air outlets inthe center and on the sides
of
your instrument panel.
You can direct the airflow side-to-sideby rotating the
thumbwheel located in the center of the vent.
The vent
can be tilted up and down also.To control the amountof
airflow through the outlets, rotate the thumbwheel
below the vent.
3-8
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, useBLEND to keep the
windshield and side windows clear.
Use DEFROST to remove fog
or ice from the
windshield quickly in extreme humid
or cold conditions.
Turn the temperature knob to the right and move the fan
control toward high.
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
-
If your vehicle hasthis
option, the rear window
will have lines that warm
the glass.
The rear window defogger will stayon for five to seven
minutes, then turnoff. If you need additional warming
time, turn it on again. You can turn the defoggeroff at
any timeby pressing the button.
Do not attach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
For I - - t results, clear the window ofas much snow or
ice as possible before using therear window defogger.
Don’t use a razor bladeor something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
To turn on the rear window defogger, find the switch
marked REAR with the defog symbol on the lower right
corner of your climate control system. Press the button
until the light in the switchcomes on, then release it. It
will only work if the ignition switch is turnedto RUN.
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional heated
outside rearview mirrors, therear window defogger
button will activate the rear window defogger and the
heated outside rearviewmirrors.
3-9
Audio Systems
AM-FM.Stereo
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily andgive years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoymentout of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first. Findout what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how
to operate all its
controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out
of the
advanced engineering that went
into it.
Setting the Clockfor Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. Withinfive seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow untilthe correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the
SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appears on the display.
Setting the Clockfor Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the systemon and off and
controls the volume.To increase volumeand turn the
radio on, turn the knob
to the right. Turn it to the leftto
decrease volume.
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears on the RECALL: Display the time with the ignition
off by
display. Press and holdMN until the correct minute
pressing the recall knob. When the radio
is playing,
appears on the display.To display the clock with the
press this knobto recall the station frequency.
ignition off, pressRECALL or HR/MN and the time
will be displayedfor a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.
3-10
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch betweenAM
and FM. The display shows yourselection.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up onthe
display. Press the right arrow to tune in the next higher
station and press the left arrow to tune
to the next lower
station. Press VOLUME or both SEEK buttons to
stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
5. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each bandby pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press thesame two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
3-11
Setting theTone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
(If Equipped)
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weakor noisy, you may
want to decrease thetreble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knobto move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knobto move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances thesound between the speakers.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the systemon and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to thetoleft
decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, pressthis
knob to recall the station frequency.
3-12
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lowerknob to switch between AM,
FMl and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radiostations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tuneto the next higher
station and the left arrowto tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.
You can set up to
2 1 stations (sevenA M , seven FM 1 and seven FM2).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2 . Press AM-FMto select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button,
the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttonsat the same time.Just:
I . Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two
buttons, the stationyou set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each
of your preset stations. The system will scan through
and play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons
for a few seconds. Presseither SEEK button or
RECALL to stop scanning through the presetstations.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weakor noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
3-13
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knobto move
the sound to the leftor right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behindthe lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers,
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is builtto work best with tapes thatare
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
Once the tapeis playing, use the knobsfor VOLUME,
BAL FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for
the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrowto reverse the cassette
tape. Press the SEEK right arrow
to stop reversing
the tape.
3-14
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrowto advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow
to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape
sides.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape orstop the
tape and playthe radio.
CLN: If this message appearson the display, the
cassette tape player needsto be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player”in the Index. Afteryou clean
the player, press and hold EJECT
for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator.The radio will display--- to
show the indicator was reset.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
SCV Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road
and wind noise as you drive.Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the
SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases thevolume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particularspeed. The volume
level should always sound the same to youas you drive.
If you don’t want to useSCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allowsfor
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
Playing the Radio
AM-FM: Press this button to switch betweenAM, FMl
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
PWR-VOL: Press this knobto turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decreasevolume. The knob is capable of
being rotated continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition offby
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrowto tune to the nextlower
station and stay there.The sound will mute
while seeking.
3-15
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appearson the display. SCAN allowsyou to
listen to stations for afew seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stopat each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM I and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold oneof the six pushbuttons.The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
3-16
P. SCAN: The preset scan button letsyou scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select
either the AM, FM 1 or FM2 mode and then press
P, SCAN. It will scan through each station storedon
your pushbuttons and stop for afew seconds before
continuing to scan through all ofthe pushbuttons. Press
P. SCAN again or oneof the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listento a specific preset station. P. SCAN
will light up on the display whilein this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (PI -P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset
station.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press lightly onthis knob to releaseit from its
stored position. Turn the knob the
to right to increase
bass and to the left to decrease bass. When the BASS
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE displaywill
go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob to the right to increase
treble and to the left to decrease treble. When the TREB
control is rotated, the AUTOTONE display will go
blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may wantto
decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control to
the right to adjust
sound to the right speakers and
to the left to adjust
sound to the left speakers.The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not usingthem.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control to the right
to adjust the
sound to the front speakers andto the left for the rear
speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to selectamong the six
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound the
to
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selectionwill switch to oneof the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western)or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREBcontrols. If a BASS
or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Push theseknobs back into their stored positionswhen
you’re not usingthem.
Playing a CassetteTape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition ison but the radio is off, the tapewill
begin playing.
3-17
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREBcontrols just as you do
for the radio. Thetape symbol and a direction arrow will
be on the display whenevera tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for
play first.
The player automaticallysenses if the cassette tape is
metal or Cr02 and adjusts for best playback sound.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol willappear on
the display.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to searchfor the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player tostop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEKoperation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
the tape tothe other.
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT buttonor the SEEK right
arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginningof the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEKoperation. The sound
will mute while searchingfor the next selection.
3-18
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse
the tape to
the beginningof the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape.The tape direction arrowwill blink
during the reverse operation.
00 (5): Press
this buttonto reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this buttonto rapidly forward thetape
to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape.The tape direction arrowwill blink
during the forward operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch froma tape to
the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to returnto the tape
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
the active mode.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will now play.EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off. Toload a cassette tape with the
ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading
the cassette.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player,press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to usea CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
I . Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter while the tape symbol is flashing.
It will power up theradio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-19
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and AutomaticTone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knobto turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turnthis knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume. The knobis capable of
rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
3-20
SCV Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume
level should always sound the sameto you as you drive.
If you don’t wantto use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notchon the control ring allows for
more volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back intoits stored
position when you’re not usingit.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN: Press and holdSEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allowsyou to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the buttonagain. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button letsyou scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM I or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station storedon
your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through allof the pushbuttons. Press
P.SCAN again or oneof the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen toa specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations storedon a pushbutton is too weakfor the
location you are in, the radio displaywill show the
channel number (PI -P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
4. Press AUTO TONEto select the setting you prefer.
Setting the Tone
5 . Press and holdone of the six pushbuttons.The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press thatnumbered button, the
station you set will return and the toneyou selected
will be automatically selectedfor that button.
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn theknob to the right to increase
bass and to the leftto decrease bass. When the BASS
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-21
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turnthe knob to the right to increase
treble and tothe left to decrease treble. When the TREB
control is rotated, the AUTOTONE display will go
blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
Push these knobsback into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to releaseit from its
stored position. Turn the controlto the right to adjust the
sound to the front speakers andto the left for the rear
speakers. The middle positionbalances the sound
between the speakers.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK,POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and releasethis button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank.This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls.If a BASS
or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONSto program
AUTO TONE.
BAL: Press lightly on this knob torelease it from its
stored position. Turn the control the
to right to adjust
sound to the right speakers and to the left to adjust
sound to the leftspeakers. The middle position balances
the sound between thespeakers.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turnthe system on.
(Please note thatyou can also turn the systemon when
you insert a compact disc into the player with the
ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and thedisc
should play. CD anda CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytimeyou are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
3-22
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
0
You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the roadgets smoother.)
0
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
It is very humid. (Ifso, wait about an hour and
try again.)
0
The disc player is veryhot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, thedisc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this buttonto play the tracks on the disc
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM againto return to
normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appearon the display. Sound
is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and hold REVto return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you pressthe REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is atthe desired
selection. Release REVto resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and holdthis button to advance rapidly
within a track.You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you pressthe FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is atthe desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and tenths of a second.The track
number will also appear when a new track begins
to
play. Press RECALL againto return to the time display.
3-23
AM-FM: While in theCD mode, press this button to
Remote CassetteTape Player (If Equipped)
stop playing the CD and play the radio.The CD symbol
will still display but the word
CD will be replaced with
either AM, FMl or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button.To
return to the player, pressCD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the lettersCD and the CD symbol will appear
If you have an AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc
on the display. (Ifthe radio is turned off, the disc stays
Automatic Tone Control System that includesa remote
in the player and will resume playing at the point where cassette player, thecassette player is located in the
it stopped.)
floor console.
EJECT: Press this buttonto eject the disc from the
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are
player and play the radio. When the
same or a new disc
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
is inserted, the disc will start playing
on track one. If a
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
compact disc is left sitting in the opening
for more than
To load a cassette tape with the ignitionoff, first press
a few seconds, the player will pull the
CD back in. The
EJECT on the remote player. Then, insert the cassette tape.
radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off,
The tape will play if the ignition on
is but the radio is off.
press this button to load a CD.
Once the tape is playing,use the control knobsfor VOL,
AUTO TONE, BAL, FADE, BASS and TREBjust as
you do for the radio. A lighted tape symbol shows when
a cassette tape is in the player. A lighted arrow will
also
appear and showthe direction of play when a tape
is active.
3-24
The player automatically senses
if the cassettetape is metal
or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound. For metal
the double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Anytime a cassette tape is inserted, the top side is
selected for play first.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow (in the
opposite direction that the lighted tape direction arrow
points) to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is neededfor the player to stop
at the beginning ofthe selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink duringthe SEEK operation and the
sound is muted in this mode.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow (in the
direction that the lighted tapedirection arrow points) to
search for the next selection. The tape direction arrow
will blink during SEEK operationand the sound is
muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press this buttonto rapidly reverse thetape.
The tape will rapidly reverseto the beginning of the
cassette reel or until you press REVagain. The radio
plays the last selected station during REV.
(5): Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby on andoff.
Dolby
tapes, is active when a tape is inserted in the remote
cassette. The double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly advance the tape.
The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette
reel or until you press FWDagain. The radio plays the
last selected station during FWD.
PROG: Press this button on the remote player to go
from one side of the tape to the other.
TAPE: Press the AM-FM button to switch from
the
player and the radio when a tape
is playing. To return to
the tape player, pressCD AUX. The lighted arrow will
appear next to the symbol and show the direction
of play
when a tape isactive.
EJECT Press this button on the remote playerto
remove the tape. EJECT can be used witheither the
ignition or radio off. Also, you must press
EJECT before
loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading.
3-25
Theft-Deterrent Feature(If Equipped)
THEFTLOCK@ is designedto discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using secret
a
code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
Your
audio system is equipped with THEFTLOCK if
THEFTLOCK is displayedon the front of the radio.
The THEFTLOCKfeature for the radio may be usedor
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the
feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK isactivated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio withthe secret
code before it willoperate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain howto enter your
secret codeto activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically revertsto
time and you muststart the procedure over atStep 4.
3-26
1. Write down anythree or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keepit in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignitionto ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radiooff.
4. Press the 1 and4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Nextyou will use the
secret code number whichyou have written down.
5. Press MN and000 will appear on the display.
6 . Press MN again to make the lasttwo digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first oneor twodigits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches thesecret code you have written down.
The display will showREP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM andthis time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radiois secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition is turnedoff.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN againto make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first oneor two digits agree
with yourcode.
5 . Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have writtendown.
The display will showSEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5 . Press MN again to makethe last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that theradio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear onthe
display. The radio will remain secureduntil the correct
code is entered.
When battery poweris removed andlater applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on andLOC will
appear on the display.
3-27
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier
in this section.
To help avoid hearingloss or damage:
0
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. Thelonger range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from thingslike storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the soundto come andgo.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise
is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adaptto higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmfulto your hearing. Take precautionsby
adjusting the volume controlon your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearingadapts to it.
3-28
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
I NOTICE:
I
I
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sureyou can
add whatyou want. If you can, it’s very
important to do properly.
it
Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation
of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radioor
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems mayinterfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer andbe sure to check Federal rules
covering mobileradio and telephoneunits.
--
--
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettesor a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN
to indicate
that you have used your tape playerfor 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassettetape player needs to be
cleaned. It willstill play tapes, butyou should clean it as
soon as possible to preventdamage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, trya
known good cassetteto see if it is the tapeor the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning methodfor your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape headas the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassetteis available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassetteto eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To
prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the
following steps.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM
Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignitionto RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radioon.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same timefor three seconds. The
tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that
the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo wit
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3-29
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbolon the display willflash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaningcassette while
the tape symbolis flashing.
5. Eject the cleaningcassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaningcassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses acassette with a fabric beltto clean
the tape head. Thistype of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbingaction, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold
EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may
degrade over time. Always make sure
the cassette tape is
in good condition beforeyou have your tape
player serviced.
3-30
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight
and dust.If the surfaceof a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center
to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges
or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleanerdiscs is not advised,due to
the risk of contaminating thelens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most
car washes
without being damaged.If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a whileto be sure the mastis still
tightened to the fender.
Section 4 Your Driving an” the Roa”
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-5
4-6
4-9
4-1 1
4-1 1
4-13
4- 14
4-14
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving Guidelines
Off-Road Driving with Your GM
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
4-27
4-28
4-3 1
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-34
4-36
4-39
4-40
4-42
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and onWet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive driving really means “be readyfor anything.’’
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are goingto be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
~
~
1
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device
in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts”in the Index.)
4-2
Rear-end collisions are aboutthemostpreventableof
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’sthebestdefensivedriving
maneuver, in bothcityandrural driving. You never
know when the vehicle infront of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that adriver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reachingfor something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even causea collision, with resulting
injury. Aska passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the roadin a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques couldsave
your life.
Death and injury associated with drinlung and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the numberone contributor to the
highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solveh s highway safety problemis
for people never todrink alcohol and then drive. But what
if people do? How much is “too much”if the driver plans
to dnve? It’s a lot less than many mightthink. Although it
depends on each person and situation, here is some general
information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood AlcoholConcentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
0
Judgment
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
Muscular Coordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
0
Vision
e The amount of food that is consumed before and
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol,so they never
drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it’s against the
law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological and developmental reasons for
these laws.
during drinking
0
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person whodrinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reachthe
same BACby drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water,this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than
a
man of hersame body weight when each has thesame
number of drinks.
The law in manyU.S. states sets the legal limit ata BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number ofU.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limitfor all
commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour).Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcoholthat counts. For example,if
the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will havea
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference,too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentageof body water than men.
4-4
of
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent.
of being in a collision
Statistics show that the chance
increases sharplyfor drivers who have a BACof
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of
0.06 percent has doubledhis or her chanceof having a
collision. At a BAC levelof 0.10 percent, the chanceof
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; ata
level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 timesgreater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
Drinking and then driving
is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can beaffected by even a smallamount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride
with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab;or if
you’re with a group, designate driver
a
who will
not drink.
--
--
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehiclego where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All threesystems have to do their work
at the places where thetires meet the road.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involvesperception time and
reaction time.
First, you haveto decide to pushon the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot anddo it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two
or three secondsor more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all playa part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
of distance in an emergency,
so
That could be a lot
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving
on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
or
and road can provide. That means you can lose control with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
gravel); the conditionof the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
of your vehicle.
tread; the conditionof your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have timeto cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wearout much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic followingdistances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system,this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
If your engine ever stops while you’redriving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes.If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longerto stop and the brake pedal
will be harderto push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS).ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a brakingskid.
When you start yourengine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will checkitself. You may
hear a momentary motoror clicking noise whilethis test
is going on. This is normal.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the roadis wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal
jumps out in
front of you.
4-7
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one
of the wheels is aboutto stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakesat each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than anydriver could. The computer is
programmed to make the mostof available tire and
road conditions.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance.If you get too closeto the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have timeto apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave
enough room up aheadto stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes.Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is
normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your
anti-lock brakes work at all times-- whether you are in
two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive,
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
4-8
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but
it will take much moreeffort.
Steering Tips
Driving onCurves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on
the news happenon curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of usis subject to
the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
Suppose you’re steering througha sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demandtoo much of those places.You
can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn thatyou should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare
based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll wantto go slower.
If you need to reduce your speedas you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while yourfront
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to
accelerate until youare out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get ina curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed isthe one factor you
can control.
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steeringcan be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problemsby braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimesyou can’t; there isn’t room. That’s
the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is betterto
remove as much speedas you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem,
to the left or
right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. Ifyou are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once
you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason
to practice defensive drivingat
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
OFF - ROAD RECOVE
LEFT APPROX.
QUARTER TURN
SLOW DOWN
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passingdriver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
edge of paved surface
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn thesteering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
0
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
0
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see asign up ahead that mightindicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a
solid line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, evenif the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
4-11
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing,
following too closely reduces your area
of vision,
especially if you’re followinga larger vehicle. Also,
you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chanceto pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stayin the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move
so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes
to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes upfor the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happensto cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down anddrop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
0
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying
to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-12
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right laneto pass. Whenyou are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicleto see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lampsare not flashing, it may
be slowing downor starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driverto get ahead ofyou. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when thethree control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enoughfriction where the
tires meet the road to dowhat the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seekan escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a slud, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the brakingskid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tiresto slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid
are best
handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down andadjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance willbe longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine brakingby shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water,ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid onlythe braking skid.
4-13
Driving Guidelines
This multipurpose passenger vehicle is defined
as a
utility vehicle in Consumer InformationRegulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)of the United States
Department of Transportation. Utility vehicles have
higher groundclearance and a narrower track to make
them capable of performing ina wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific designcharacteristics give them a
higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.An
advantage of the higher groundclearance is a better
view of the road allowing youto anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional two-wheel-drive vehiclesany more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turnsor abrupt maneuvers. As with
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or
vehicle rollover.
4-14
Off-Road Driving withYour GM
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide isfor vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes’’in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you
shouldn’t drive off-road unlessyou’re on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be greatfun. But it does have some
definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve leftthe great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked.There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphillor downhill. In
short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help
make your off-road drivingsafer and more enjoyable.
Befi:
-
1
1
~
u Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure
you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough
fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels
up where they shouldbe? What are the local laws that
apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you
don’t know, you shouldcheck with law enforcement
people in the area. Will you be on someone’sprivate
land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
0
The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
CAUTION:
0
0
0
Cargo on the load floor
piled higher than
the seatbacks canbe thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the topof the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can
be
struck by flying objects.Secure the
cargo properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more
likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on roof.
the
Keep cargo in the cargo areafar
asforward
and low as possible.
You’ll find other importantinformation in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.
4-15
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and
satisfying
recreation. However,it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protecting the environment:
It makes senseto plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
You are much less likelyto get bad surprises. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try
to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
0
Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
It’s also a good ideato travel with atleast one other
vehicle. If something happens toone of them, the other
can help quickly.
0
Avoid any drivingpractice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses-- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down treesor unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
Does your vehicle have a winch?If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote
area, a winch canbe
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want
to know how to
use it properly.
0
Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
0
Take extreme care with open
fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
0
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch
fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-16
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’ssafe and
close to home before yougo into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your sensesto different kinds of signals.Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Yourears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need
to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
Scanning the Terrain
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to
keep in mind. At higher speeds:
0
0
0
Off-road driving can take you over manydifferent kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and
its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
you approach things faster and you have less time to
scan the terrain for obstacles.
you have less time to react.
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
you'll need more distance for braking, especially
since you're on an unpc"=.?d
surface.
Sugace Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
I
hard-packed dirt, gravel,rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind
of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction andlonger
braking distances.
Sugace Obstacles . Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
When you're driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you
out of position. This could cause
you to lose
control andcrash. So, whether you're driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
safety
belts.
wear
hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle youif
you're not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even therise and fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
0
Is the path ahead clear?
0
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
0
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There's
more discussion of these subjects later.)
0
Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-17
When you drive overobstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your handsif
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles,
your wheels canleave the ground. If this happens, even
with one ortwo wheels, youcan’t control the vehicleas
well or at all.
Because you will be onan unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from drivingon paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limitsor signal
lights. You have to use your own goodjudgment about
what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving canbe very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At
the very time you need specialalertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment can be
affected by even a small amountof alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the
Index.
4-18
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takesyou up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
There are some hills that simplycan’t be driven, no
matter how well built the vehicle.
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle, If
you drive up them,you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed, If you
drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steepto climb, descend or
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small
hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where you
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the
incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may
not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by
bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
0
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
0
What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to
find out.
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
0
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheelsto start spinning
or sliding.
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If
the path twists and turns, you might wantto find
another route.
4-19
’ /1\
I
~
1
T
u
,Ang
ordriving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured orkilled. When drivingup hills,
always try togo straight up.
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic on trailsor hills.
0
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
let opposing trafficknow you’re there.
Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visibleto oncoming traffic.
4-20
1
Driving to the top (crest)
of a hill at full speedcan
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near
the topof a hill, slow down and stay alert.
@
What should I do if my vehicle stalls, oris about
hill?
to stall, andI can’t make it up the
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s whatyou should do:
the hill.
0
CAUTIs-N:
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
0
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
0
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to
restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your
vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the
engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as
straight as possible in REVERSE (R).
As you are backing down the hill, put yourleft hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheelsare straight
and maneuver as you back down. It’s best thatyou
back down the hill with your wheelsstraight rather
than in theleft or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far tothe left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
Here are some things youmust not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you
have a manual transmission)to “rev-up” the engine
and regain forward momentum. This won’t work.
Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and
you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then
apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R), release
the parking brake, and slowly back straight down.
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to
to cause you to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough
roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up
the hill, you must backstraight down the hill.
&= Suppose, after stalling,I try to back down the
hill and decideI just can’t doit. What should
I do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission
in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine.Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exiton the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
4-21
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takesyou downhill, you’ll wantto
consider a number of things:
0
Heavy braking when goingdown a hill can cause
This could cause
your brakes to overheat and fade.
loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the
brakes lightly when descendinga hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
How steep is the downhill? WillI be able to maintain
vehicle control?
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
0
What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bankor even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you cango down a hill safely, then tryto
keep your vehicle headedstraight down, and use a low
gear. This way, engine dragcan help your brakes and
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control
at all times.
4-22
-
@
Are there some things I should not dowhen
driving downa hill?
A:
Yes! These are important because if you
ignore them you couldlose control and have a
serious accident.
0
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s nottoo
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over ifyou don’t drive straight down.
0
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed
in a manual shift. This iscalled “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will haveto do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
@
Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A:
It’s much more likelyto happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here’s whatto do.
0
from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the
likelihood thevehicle will tumble end over end. But
when you drive across an incline, the much more
narrow track width (the distance between the left and
right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle
from tilting
and rolling over.Also, driving acrossan incline puts
more weight on thed o w h l l wheels. This could cause
Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
a Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the
manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
a Shift back to a low gear,release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
0
If the engine won’tstart, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probablygo across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline.Here are some
things to consider:
0
A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steepto drive across. When yougo straight up or
down a hill, the lengthof the wheel base (the distance
a downhill slide or a rollover.
0
Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loosegravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (arock, a rut, etc.)and roll over.
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels,or if the downhill wheelsdrop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle cantilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across anincline. Just because
the trail goes across theincline doesn’t mean you have
to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
4-23
Stalling on an Incline
Driving across an incline that’s too steep
will
make yourvehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured orkilled. If you have any doubt
about thesteepness of the incline, don’tdrive
across it. Find another route instead.
What if I’m driving acrossan incline that’s not
too steep, butI hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What shouldI do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent theside slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what thesurhce is
like before you drive it.
4-24
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing
an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder
to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and
the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be rightin its path.
If you have to walk down theslope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will takeif it does roll over.
A CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill(low) side of
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rollsover, you could be crushedor killed.
Always get out on the uphill
(high) sideof the
vehicle and staywell clear of the rollover path.
Driving in
d,
md, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly,
turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer
braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In reallydeep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a changein wheel
traction. But itwill depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand(as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking.You may
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worsttire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the tractionis so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can causeyou to slide
out of control.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds
or rivers canbe
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your
vehicle could fall through theice and you and
your passengers could drown. Drive your
vehicle
on safe surfacesonly.
4-25
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy raincan mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extremecaution.
Find out how deep the water is beforeyou drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it-- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water thatdeep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive throughit slowly.
At fast speeds, watersplashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able tostart your
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet,it may take you longer
to stop.
’A
CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
If it’s
and you and your passengers could drown.
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
through rushing water.
~
See “Driving Through Water” inthe Index for more
information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brushor debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations canbe a fire hazard.
Aftc- lperation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings
cleaned andchecked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the bodystructure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines
and cooling
system for any leakage.
~
4-26
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Rere are some tips on night driving.
0
0
Driving at Night
0
0
0
0
Drivedefensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up onlyso much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but theyalso make a lot
of things invisible.
4-27
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a secondor two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
1
-I and
on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass
can build upa film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than cleanglass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light upfar less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way,it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Somedrivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t
even aware of it.
4-28
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerateor turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wiseto go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexesare
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harderit is to see. Evenif your
windshield wiper blades arein good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, theedge of the road and even
people walking.
It's wise to keep your wiping equipmentin good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through somecar washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them.
Wet brakes can causeaccidents. They won't work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle
of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes worknormally.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous.So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ridethe
onwater.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
I
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
is slightly
engine. Never drive through water that
lower than the underbodyof your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can
if your
tires do not have much treador if the pressurein one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of wateris standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happensat higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fastrule about hydroplaning.The
best advice isto slow down whenit is raining.
I
I
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful whenyou pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself moreclear room
ahead, and be preparedto have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
4-30
NOTICE:
I
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with citystreets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll wantto watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and payattention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
a Know the best way to getto where you are going. Get
a city map and planyour trip into an unknownpart of
the cityjust as you would for a cross-country trip.
a
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
a Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both waysfor vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
4-31
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, thereis usually aramp that leadsto the
freeway. If you have aclear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to
check traffic. Tryto determine where you expectto
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto
the prevailing speed. Switchon your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder
as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway,adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailingrate if it’s slower. Stay
in theright lane unless you wantto pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to move
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly
slower at night.
expressways, turnpikesor superhighways) are the safest
of allroads.Buttheyhavetheirownspecialrules.Whenyouwant
to leavethefreeway,move to theproper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,do not,
The most
adviceOn
driving is:
under
any
circumstances,
stop and
back
up.
Drive
on
to
up with traffic and keepto the right. Drive at the same
the nextexit.
speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fastor
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp can
be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
left lane on a freeway as a passinglane.
4-32
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check beforea trip:
Reduce your speed accordingto your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
to the
recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Shouldyou delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Tryto be well rested. If you
must start when you’re notfresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles thatfirst part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoesyou
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s readyto go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
GM
dealerships all across North America. They’llbe ready
and willing to help if you need it.
4-33
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is’there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is itjust plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something about aneasy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along withthe hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can youdo about highway hypnosis?First, be
aware thatit can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving inflat or rolling terrain.
If You get
Pull Off the road into a
service
Or parking area and take a nap, get Someexercise, Or
both.
For
safety,
treat
drowsiness
on
the highway
as
an emergency.
If you drive regularly insteep country, or if you’re
planningtovisitthere,here
are sometipsthatcanmake
your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road
Driving,7 in the Index for
about driving
off-road.)
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
A CAUTION:
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the workof slowing down. They couldget
so hot thatthey wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking or
even none going down
a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine
running and yourvehicle in gear when you
go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go
down a steep or long hill.
,
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could so
get
hot that theywouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking oreven none going down a
hill. You could crash. Shift down to
let your
engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear.The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, andyou can climb the
hill better.
0
Stay in your ownlane when driving on two-lane
roads in hillsor mountains. Don’t swing wideor cut
across the centerof the road. Drive at speeds that
let
you stay in your own lane.
e As you go over the top of a hill, bealert. There could
be something in yourlane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
4-35
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are sometips for winterdriving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving
under severeconditions, include a small bagof sand, a
piece of old carpetor a coupleof burlap bagsto help
provide traction. Besure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be
very careful.
4-36
Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Trynot to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
[:
m
..........................................
--===l
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble becauseit may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32”F; OOC) and freezing rain beginsto fall.
Try to avoid driving on wetice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spotthat’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where thesun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surfaceof a curve or an overpassmay
remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If
you see a patch ofice ahead of you, brake beforeyou
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.
4-37
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stoppedby heavy snow, you could be ina
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unlessyou know for sure that you are nearhelp
and you can hike throughthe snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-38
P -1AUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill
you. You can’t seeit or smell it,so you might not
know it is inyour vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s awayfrom the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for theheat that you get and itkeeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only whenyou feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as youcan. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half houror so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Vehicles with two-wheel drive or the electronic shift
transfer case require special modificationsbefore they
can be towed in this manner. Please contact your dealer
for the towing information that is appropriate for your
particular vehicle.
4-39
The Certificatioflire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loadson
your front andrear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle.
Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equallyon
both sides of thecenterline.
Loading Your Vehicle
I ,
1
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the frontor rear axle.
.
u u
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
o n
0 0
\SEE
\
FNER’S
MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. TI
I
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge, above the door latch.The label shows thesize of
your original tires and the inflation pressures needed
to
obtain the gross weight capacityof your vehicle. This is
called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).
The
GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight,
if pulling a trailer.
4-40
If you do have a heavy load,you should spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note your vehicle’s
CertificationjTire label or consult your dealer
for
additional details.
/A
CAULON:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak,
or it can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control.Also,
overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension componentsto get added
durability might not change your weight ratings.Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle theright way.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that failbecause of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anythingelse -- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and
injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in
a crash.
0 Put things in the cargo area
of your vehicle.
Try to spread theweight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside thevehicle so that someof them are
above the topsof the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraintin
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever
you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
There’s also important loading informationfor off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.
4-41
Payload
Towing a Trailer
The payload capacity is shown on theCertificatiodTire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Besure to include the weight of the
occupants as partof your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the
factory, rememberto subtract the weight of these things
from the payload.Your dealer can help you withthis.
CAUTION:
--
Add-on Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a
limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle.
Be sure to weigh your vehicle beforeyou buy and install
the new equipment.
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. Forexample, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers couldbe seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in thissection. Ask your dealerfor advice
and information abouttowing atrailer with
your vehicle.
~
~
NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn’t coverparts or
components that fail
because of overloading.
4-42
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow
the advice in thispart, andsee your dealer for
important information abouttowing atrailer
with your vehicle.
Every Vehicle is ready for some trailer towing. If yours
was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready
for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has tobe
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
0
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
0
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 k m h ) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wearin at the
heavier loads.
0
If you have an automatic transmission, you can
use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to,a lower gear)
when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in
THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
buildup and extend the life of your transmission. If
you have a manual transmission and you are towing
a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just
drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, asyou need to, a
lower gear).
If You Do DecideTo Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
0
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where youlive but
also where you’ll bedriving. A good source for this
information can bestate or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
0
the weight of the trailer,
0
the weight of the trailer tongue
0
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-43
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy cana trailer safely be?
It depends on howyou plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a
trailer are all important. And,it can also depend on any
special equipment that you haveon your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your
trailer can
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Axle Ratio
Trailer Wt.
2-Wheel Drive,
Auto. Trans.
3.08
3.42
4,500 lbs. (2 041 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
2-Wheel Drive,
Manual Trans.
3.424,500Ibs.
4-Wheel Drive &
All- Wheel Drive,
Auto. Trans.
3.08
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
3.425,000
lbs. (2 268 kg)
3.73
5,000 lbs. (2 268kg)
4-Wheel Drive &
All-Wheel Drive,
Manual Trans.
3.42
Vehicle
4-44
(2 041 kg)
4,000 Ibs. (1 8 14kg)
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver andone passenger are in the tow vehicle and
it
has allthe required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us atthe address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A)of any trailer is an important
weight to measure becauseit affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle.The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who willbe
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow
a trailer, you
must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight,
too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Indexfor more information about
your vehicle’s maximumload capacity.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certificatioflire label on the driver’s door edge, above
the door latch, or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then
be sure you don’t goover the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
A
B
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roadsare a
few reasons why you’ll need
the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicleloading and good
handling when you’re driving.
If you’re usinga weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded yourtrailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately,to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
0
Will you have to make any holes inthe body of your
vehicle when youinstall a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal theholes later when
you remove thehitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide(CO) from yourexhaust can get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and watercan, too.
4-45
Safety Chains
Your trailer’s brake systemcan tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake systemonly if
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
and your trailer.Cross the safety chains under the tongue
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
of the trailerso that the tongue will notdrop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
The trailer’s brake system will useless than
about safety chains maybe provided by the hitch
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
won’t work well.You could evenlose your brakes.
chains and do not attach themto the bumper. Always
If everything checksout this far, then make the brake
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends
And, never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground.
fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing
for
this. If you do, it will bend and finally break
off. Use
Trailer Brakes
steel brake tubing.
If your trailer weighs more than1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
4-46
Driving with a Trailer
I
A GA
‘TION:
If you have a rear-mostwindow open andyou
pull a trailerwith your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into yourvehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness or
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in the
Index.) To
maximize your safety when towing
a trailer:
0 Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
0 If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drivewith your front, main
heating orcooling systemon and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use
MAX AfC because it only recirculates the
air inside yourvehicle. (See “Comfort
Controls” in theIndex.)
Towing atrailer requires a certain amountof experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of
handling and braking with the added weightof the
trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearlyas
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safetychains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving an
then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps andany trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoidsituations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
4-47
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’rea good
deal longer, you’ll needto go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle beforeyou can return to your lane.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have extra
wiring anda heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included in
the optional trailering package).
Backing Up
Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailerto the left,just move that hand
to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,
if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps willalso flash, telling other
drivers you’re aboutto turn, change lanesor stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flashfor turns evenif the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when theyare not. It’s important
to check occasionallyto be sure the trailer bulbsare
still working.
Driving On Grades
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailerto come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.
4-48
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start
down a longor steep downgrade. Ifyou don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakesso much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 k m h ) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
If you have an automatic transmission,you should use
DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will
minimize heat buildup and extend the
life of your
transmission. Or, if you have a manual transmission,
it’s better not to use FIFTH ( 5 ) gear, just drive in
FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil
at a
lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show
signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK(P) (or the
manual transmission outof gear and the parking brake
applied) for a few minutes before turning the
engine off.
If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
Parking on Hills
You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People canbe injured, and both
your vehicle andthe trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever haveto park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1 . Apply your regular brakes, but don’tshift into
PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
transmission. Then turn your wheelsinto the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
trailer wheels.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
3. When the wheel chocksare in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shiftinto PARK (P), or
REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.
5 . If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a
manual transfer case shift lever, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear-- not in NEUTRAL (N).
6. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking ona Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
0
Startyourengine;
0
Shift into a gear; and
0
R.elease the parking brake.
4-49
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedulefor more
on this. Things thatare especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake adjustment. Eachof these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will helpyou find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s agood idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodicallyto see that all hitch nuts andbolts
are tight.
Trailer WiringH-T--ess
The light duty trailer wir is a six-wire harness
assembly. The optional heavy-duty trailer wiringis an
eight-wire harness assembly. The harnesses are stored
under the vehicle, along the passenger-side frame
crossmember on two-door vehicles or on the driver’s side
corner frame rear crossmember on four-door vehicles. The
heavy-duty trailer wiring has a 30-amp feed wire with
an
inline fuse locatedby the junction block.
See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”in the Index. Both
harnesses haveno connector and shouldbe wired by a
qualified electrical technician.The technician can use
the following color codechart when connecting the
wiring harnessto your trailer.
0
Dark Blue: Usefor electric trailer brakes or
auxiliary wiring.
0
Red: Use for battery charging;it connects to the
starter solenoid (eight-wire harness only).
0
Light Green: Back-up lamps (eight-wire
harness only).
0
Brown: Taillamps and parking lamps.
0
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal.
0
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal.
0
White (Heavy Gage): Ground wire.
0
White (Light Gage): Auxiliary stoplamp.
Securely attach the harnessto the trailer, then tape or
strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave
it loose enoughso the wiring doesn’t bend or break,
but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the
harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together
and tie it neatlyso it won’t be damaged.
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-7
5- 12
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-20
5-2 1
5-2 1
5-34
5-35
Engine FanNoise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped)
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the button on top of
the steering column all the
way down t o make your
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on andoff.
.....q
..
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your keyis in, and evenif the key isn’tin,
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first
click and release.
Your hazard warning flasherslet you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and
off.
5-2
When the hazard warning flashersare on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other WarningDevices
I
NOTICE:
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage
to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Trying tostart your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, andit could damage yourvehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has rundown, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do
it safely.
IJTTT’Jr
I . Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
-
Batteries can nurryou. They can De
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burnyou.
They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.
0 They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these stepsexactly, some or all
of these things can hurt
you.
NOTICE:
If the othersystem isn’ta 12-volt systemwith a
negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
I
5-3
2. Get the vehiclesclose enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other.If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parlung brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the procedure. Put an automatic transmission vehicle
in PARK (P) and a manual transmission vehiclein
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter, or accessory poweroutlets, if you have this
option. Turn off all lamps thataren’t needed as well
as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it couldbe badly
damaged. The repairwouldn’t be coveredby
your warranty.
5-4
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
AUTION:
I
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas toexplode. People have beenhurt doing this,
and some havebeen blinded. Use a flashlightif
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You don’t
need to add water to the
ACDelco Freedom@
battery installed in everynew GM vehicle. But if
a battery has fillercaps, besure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care
of that first.If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that thejumper cables don’t have looseor
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damagedtoo.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive(+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a metal
engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe otherparts too.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the
dead battery.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the
good battery.
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other end
of the negative cable
doesn’t go to the dead
battery. It goesto a
heavy unpainted metal
part on theengine of the
vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-5
9. Attach the cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery,
but not nearengine parts
that move.
12. Remove the cables in reverse orderto prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
The electrical
connection isjust as
good there, but the
chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is
much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery andrun
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.If it
won’t start aftera few tries, make sure all
connections are good.If it still won’t start, it
probably needs service.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once theengiv is running.
5-6
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a GM dealer or aprofessional towing
service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Assistance” in
the Index.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was
factory-new by adding things like fog lamps, aero
skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions
may not be correct.
Whether you can move the shift lever for the
transmission and shift the transfer case, if you
have one.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
know that this manual contains these towing
instructions. The operator may want to see them.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
Whether your vehicle has rear-wheel drive,
four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
5-7
’ A CAUTION:
1
I
To help avoidinjury to you or others:
0 Never let passengersride ina vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
Never tow with damagedparts not f d y secured.
0 Never get under your vehicle after it has
been liftedby the tow truck.
Always use separate safety chains on each
side when towinga vehicle.
0 Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
5-8
A vehicle can fall from acar carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause a collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains
or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t usesubstitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.)that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damagedrivetrain and
suspension components.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key
turned to the OFF position. The steering wheel should
be clamped in a straight-ahead position with a clamping
device designed for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission
should be inNEUTRAL (N) and the transfer case, if you
have one, should be in 2HI. The parking brake should
be released.
3. Move the solenoid lever
toward the driver’s side
to unlock it.
If your vehicle hasa floor-mounted shifter and no
electrical power, the electrical solenoid lock mustbe
overridden to shift from PARK (P) to NEUTRAL (N).
Follow these steps:
1. Push the base of the shift lever boot forward with
your thumb.
2. Lift the boot and find the white solenoid lever.
4. While holding the solenoid lever in the unlock
position, press the shift lever button and shift into
NEUTRAL (N).
5. Release the solenoid lever and snap the boot back
into place.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the
drive wheels
unless you must. If the vehicle mustbe towed on the
drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed anddistance
restrictions later in this section or your transmission will
be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, then
the drive wheels have to be supported ona dolly.
5-9
Front Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 k d ) , 50 miles (80 km)
Vehicles with the all-wheel drive or four-wheel drive
with the electronic transfer case option must use a
towing dolly under the rearwheels when towing from
the front.
5-10
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or
fascidfog lamp damagewill occur. Usewheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chains andwheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfacescould
damage avehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle
to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage, installa towing dolly and
raise thevehicle until adequate clearance
is
obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
Rear Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 k h ) , 50 miles (80 km)
Vehicles with the all-wheel drive or four-wheeldrive
with the electronic transfer case option must use a
towing dolly under the front wheels when towing from
the reaE
k3?
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or rear
bumper valance damage will occur. Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrierequipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over roughsurfaces could
damage avehicle. Damagecan occur from vehicle
to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment.
Unless you have all-wheeldrive, to help avoid
damage, install a towing dollyand raise the
vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained
between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cablesor J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen usingcar-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the
T-hook slots.
5-11
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gageon your
vehicle’s instrument panel.See “Gages” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated engine canburn you
badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil
there is no signof steam or coolant beforeyou
open the hood.
If you keepdriving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids init can catch fire.You or
others could be badlyburned. Stop your engineif
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
I NOTICE:
If your engine catchesfire because you keep
driving with no coolant,your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly
repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-12
I
If No Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes
the enginecan get a littletoo hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
If there’s still no signof steam, push the accelerator until
the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle
speed. Bring the engine speed backto normal idle speed
after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops.
But then, if you still have the warning,turn ofSthe
engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it
cools down.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windowas necessary,
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no signof steam,
try this for aminute or so:
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3) for
automatic transmissions.
5-13
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
i
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
5-14
The coolant level should be at least up to the
ADD mark.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
A CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’ttouch them. If you
do, youcan be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak.If you run
the engine, it could loseall coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could beburned.
Get any leak fixed beforeyou drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t coveredby your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See
if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t founda problem yet, butthe coolant level
isn’t at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean
water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
Adding onlyplain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before
the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system isset for the proper coolant
mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could beburned.
Use a 50EO mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL@coolant.
5-15
~~
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
You can be burnedif you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolanton a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank
is atthe
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s
one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directlyto the radiator, but besure the cooling
system is cool before youdo it.
5-16
J-
IW to
Add Coolant to the Radiator
Steam and scalding liquids from a cooling
hot
system canblow out and burnyou badly. They
are under pressure, and
if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they cancome out
at high speed. Never turn the capwhen the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and
radiator pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to
turn the pressurecap.
--
--
1. You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the pressurecap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first stops, (Don’t press
down while turning the pressurecap.)
If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-17
2. Then keep turning the pressurecap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressurecap.
5-18
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture, upto the base of the filler neck.
(See “Engine Coolant” in the Indexfor more
information about the proper coolant mixture.)
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tankto ADD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the pressurecap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run untilyou can feel the
upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch outfor the
engine cooling fan.
7 . By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator
filler neck may be lower.If the level is lower, add
more of the properDEX-COOL@coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-19
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine coolingfan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fanspins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages.
So you
may hear an increasein fan noise. This is normal and
should not be mistaken as the transmission slippingor
making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down
when
additional cooling isnot required and the
clutch disengages.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressurecap line up like this.
5-20
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It willgo away as the fan clutch disengages.
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusualfor a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain yourtires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
If a fronttire fails, the flat tire will create adrag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stopwell out of the traffic lane.
H rear blowout, particularly on
a curve, acts much like a
skid and mayrequire the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you canstill steer. Gently
brake to a stop-- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a tire can cause an injury, The
vehicle
can slipoff the jack and
roll overyou or other
people. You and they could be badlyinjured.
Find a level place to change your tire.
To help
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift
lever inPARK (P)or shift a manual
transmission to FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R).
3. Thrn off the engine.
4. Put thewheel blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed.That would be the
tire on the other side
of the vehicle, at
the opposite end.
5-21
The following steps will tellyou how to use thejack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools
The jacking equipment you’ll needis stored along the
driver’s side inner rear quarter panels.In some cases,
you may have to remove the sparetire in order to reach
the jack. Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves
and a plastic ground mat
to assist in the changingof a
flat tire.
5-22
The following instructions explain howto remove the
spare tire, depending on whereit is mounted on
your vehicle.
I NOTICE:
Never remove or restowa tire frondtoa stowage
position under the vehicle while the vehicle is
supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire
fully against the undersideof the vehicle
when restowing.
To remove the
underbody-mounted spare,
insert the chisel end of the
wheel wrench, on an angle,
into the hole in the rear
bumper. Be sure the chisel
end of the wheel wrench
connects into the hoist shaft.
I NOTICE:
-
~~
To help avoid vehicle damage,do not drive the
vehicle before the cableis properly stored.
If you have an inside-mounted spare tire, the tire must
be removed in order to have access to the jack storage.
remove an inside-mounted spare tire, reachinto your
tire’s cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center
of the
wheel. Remove it and the retainer. Unhook the tire from
the mounting bracket and remove the cover.
10
Turn the wheel wrench to the left to lower the spare tire.
Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare
tire can
be pulled out from under the vehicle.
When the tirehas been completely lowered, tilt the
retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
To remove a rear-mounted spare tire, first make sure
that the carrier arm is fully-latched to the endgate. Then
remove the sparetire cover.
5-23
'
The locking wheel nut can
be removed by snapping the
rubber weathercover off the
face of the lock case.
Insert the key and pull the
lock case straight off. It is
not necessary to turn
the key.
Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-24
The tools you'll be using includethe jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B). Your vehicle may also have an optional hub
cap removal tool.
Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench in the
notch of the hub cap and pry off the hubcap.
Some of the moldedplastic hub capshave imitation
wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t
fit these imitation nuts,so don’t try to remove them with
the socket endof the wheel wrench.
If you have individual wheel nut caps
that cover each
nut, they mustbe removed in order to get to the wheel
nuts. Use the socket end
of the wheel wrenchto remove
the wheel nutcaps.
Your wheel nut caps may attach your hubcap to the
wheel. Remove these wheel nut caps before you take
the hub cap.
5-25
Removing theFlat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
A. Front Frame Hole
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle to the right to raise the jack
lift head.
3. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the
flat tire.
5-26
B. Rear Frame Hole (2-Door) or Spring Hanger
Hole
(4-Door)
Getting undera vehicle when it is jacked upis
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badlyinjured or killed. Never getunder
a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.
r-Raising yourvehicle with the jack improperly
l
positioned can damage thevehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head
into the proper location
before raising
the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicleby turning the jack handle to the
right. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the ground so
there is enough room for the spare tireto fit.
5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-27
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
I
Never use oil or grease onstuds ornuts. If you
do, the nuts mightcome loose. Your wheelcould
fall off, causing a serious accident.
7. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.
1st or dirton the w ,el,or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause anaccident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the
places
where thewheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to
use a scraper orwire
brush later,if you need to, to get allthe rust or
dirt off.
5-28
Put the nutson by hand.
Make sure the
cone-shaped end is
toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheelis
held against the hub.If a
nut can’t be turned by
hand, use the wheel
wrench and see your
dealer as soon
as possible.
.
.
10. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle to the
left. Lower the jack completely.
5-29
I
A CAUTION:
I
&!,
Incorrect wheel nuts or Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to
an accident.
Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them,be sure toget new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhereas soon asyou can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto 100 Ib-ft
(140 N-m).
I NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
5-30
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strikesomeone. Store all these
in the proper place.
I
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted
spare.
1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed down andto the rear.
2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.
A.Retainer
B. Valve Stem (Pointeci Down)
C. Spare or Flat Tire
D. Spring
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Lower
G. Raise
H. Hoist Arm
3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle,
through the hole in therear bumper and into the hoist
shaft. Turn the wheel wrench to the right until the
tire is raised against the undersideof the vehicle.
You will hear two “clicks” when thetire is secure.
but pull on the tire to make sure.
5-31
Follow this diagram for the inside-mounted spare.
Follow this diagram for the rear-mounted spare.
C7
A. Spare or Flat Tire
A. Wheel Carrier
B. Retainer
C. Nut
D. Wheel Carrier
E. Hook
B. Spare or Flat Tire
C. Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder
5-32
Reinstall the locking wheel nut using the wheel wrench.
Then push the lockcase onto the lug nut untilit stops.
The key does not have to be inserted into the lock. Push
the lock case to be sure it issecured. The special lug nut
and lock case is not intended to be used on any road
wheel, only on the spare wheel carrier. Tightenthe nuts
on the wheelcarrier to 22 to 32 lb-ft (30 to 40 Nem).
/-A
Return thejack, wheel wrench and wheel blocksto the
proper location in your vehicle’srear area. Secure the
items and replace thejack cover.
A. Retainer
B. Rubber Band (Some Models)
C. Work Gloves
D. Mat
E. Jack Storage Cover
E WheelBlocks
G. Hub Cap Removal Tool (Some Models)
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack
J. JackingInstructions
5-33
’
CAUTION:
Make sure the tire and carrier aresecure.
Driving with thetire or carrierunlatched could
injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails.The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire(If Equipped)
Although the compactspare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it canlose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi
(420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and makesure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds upto 65 mph
(105 W h ) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-sizetire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’sbesf
to replace your spare with full-size
a
tire as soon as you
can. Your spare will last longer and
be in good shape in
case you needit again.
5-34
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’tmix your compact sparetire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice
or
Snow
What you don’t wantto dowhen your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheelstoo fast. Themethod known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’restuck, but
you must use caution.
I
1 NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about usingtire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
If you let your tires s p ~ n high
a t speed, theycan
explode, and you or others could beinjured. And
the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could causean engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as show]
on the speedometer.
5-35
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
Using the Kecovery Hooks
First, turn your steering wheelleft and right. That will
clear the area around yourfront wheels. If you have a
four-wheel drive vehicle,shift into 4HI. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear(or
with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you
out after a few tries, you may needto be towed out. Or,
you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” inthe Index.
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.The
recovery hooks are provided at thefront of your vehicle.
You may need to use themif you’re stuck off-road
and need to be pulledto some place where youcan
continue driving.
5-36
The recovery hooks, when used, are undera lot of
force. Always pull thevehicle straight out. Never
pull on the hooksat a sideways angle. The hooks
could break off and you or otherscould be
injured from the chain or cable snapping
back.
I
NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and itwould not
be covered by warranty.
5-37
fi
5-38
NOTES
Section 6 Service and Appnara--~2 Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins withservice and fuel information,
and then itshows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-7
6-8
6-10
6- 14
6-15
6-1 9
6-20
6-2 1
6-22
6-23
6-26
6-27
6-27
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Rear Axle
Four-wheel Drive
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Power Steering Fluid
6-28
6-29
6-32
6-33
6-38
6-40
6-49
6-50
6-52
6-54
6-57
6-58
6-58
6-58
6-64
6-64
6-65
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VTN)
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to
be happy withit. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supportedservice people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper GMService Manual. Ittells you
much more about howto service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want tokeep your GM vehicle allGM.
Genuine GM parts haveone of these marks:
Genuine
6-2
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto
do your own service work,see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date
of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record”in the Index.
/!\ CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before youattempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipmentto the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add tothe outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meetspecifications
ASTM D48 14 inthe United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have
been developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines
meeting the AAMAspecification could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
protection compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may geta heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage yourengine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t haveto buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
6-3
If your vehicleis certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated onthe underhood emission control
label), it is designedto operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected.The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may faila smog-check test. If this occurs, return
to your authorizedGM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may notbe covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines thatare not reformulatedfor low
emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT);
ask yourservice station operator whether or not hisfuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines.If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performancemay be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
6-4
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to containadditives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in yourengine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly.Therefore, you should not haveto
add anythingto the fuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your areato
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolinesif they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’tuse it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
If you plan ondriving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improperfuel wouldn’t becovered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask anauto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’llbe driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the driver’s side
of your vehicle.
6-5
A CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause
very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
To remove thecap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
I
If you get gasoline on yourselfand then
something ignites it,
you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on
you if you open the
fuel fillercap too quickly. This spraycan happen
if your tankis nearly full, andis more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel
filler cap slowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the capall the way.
Be careful notto spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
While refueling, hang the
cap by the tether from the
hook on thefiller door.
6-6
When you put the cap back on, turn it tothe right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in theIndex.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure toget the right
type. Yourdealer can get onefor you. If you get
the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank andemissions system may be
damaged. See “MalfunctionIndicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Never filla portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can
be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoidinjury to you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill acontainer while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening beforeoperating
the nozzle. Contact should bemaintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-7
Checking ThingsUnder the Hood
'A
I
Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
CAUTION:
Things that burn can
get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like
gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic
or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill
things thatwill burn ontoa hot engine.
To open the hood,first pull
the handleinside the vehicle
on the lower driver's side of
the instrument panel.
Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and
put the hood prop into the slot in the hood.
You may
have a lamp that comes on when you lift the hood.
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:
A.
8.
C.
D.
E.
Battery
Coolant Recovery Tank
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Transmission Dipstick
E
G.
H.
I.
J.
Power Steering Reservoir
Brake Master Cylinder
Air Cleaner
Fuse Block
Windshield Washer Fluid
6-9
Before closing the hood,be sure all thefiller caps are on
properly. Then lift the hoodto relieve pressure on the
hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop toits retainer.
Then just pull the hood down firmly
to close. It will
latch when dropped from10 to12 inches (25 to 30 cm)
without pressingon the hood.
6-10
Engine Oil
It’s a good ideato check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, theoil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The oil dipstick is a
yellow ring.
Turn off the engine and
give the oila few minutes
to drain backinto the oil
pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show
the actual level.
Checking EngineOil
When to Add Engine Oil
Pull out thedipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need
to add at leastone quart of oil. But you must usethe
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your engine hasso
much oil that the’oillevel gets above the
cross-hatched area thatshows the proper
operating range,your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the way
back in whenyou’re through.
6-11
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommendedfor your vehicle canbe identified
by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified
by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oilwhich
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
If you change your ownoil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
RECOMMENDED SAE VlSCOSlN GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAL VlSCOSlN GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
LOOK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
/.Frl/)
--
SAE 1OW-30
If you have your oilchanged for you, be surethe oil
put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shownin the following chart:
i
SAE 5W-30
PREFERRED
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-12
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can useSAE 1OW-30 if it’s going
to be 0”F (- 18O C) or above. These numbers on anoil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as S A E 20W-50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20°F (-29”C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely lowtemperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change EngineOil
If any one of these is true foryou, use the short tripkity
maintenance schedule:
0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0 You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road
frequently.
0 You frequently tow a trailer or uSe a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
0 The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner.If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you needto change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km)or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long triphighway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
6-13
Remote Oil Filter(Four-wheel Drive)
The access door for theremote oil filter is
in the steering
linkage shield assemblylocated under the radiator
support. Twist the screwto unlock or lock the door.
If you openthe door, make sure it is securely closed
when you are finished.
Air Cleaner
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthyfor your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’tlet used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean yourskin and nails withsoap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal
of oil products.)
To remove the air cleaner, removethe wing nuts that
Used oil can bea real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to
all free-flowing oil hold
the cover on. Remove the cover and lift Out the
air
from the filter before disposal. Don’tever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash,-pouring
it on the ground, into
Insert a new air filter, then replace the air cleaner cowx.
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
Tighten the wing nuts to hold the cover in place.
recycle it by taking it to a place thatcollects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposingof your usedoil,
ask your dealer,a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
6-14
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can
cause you or others tobe burned. The air cleaner
not only cleansthe air, it stops flameif the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there,and theengine
backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working onthe engine with
the air cleaner off.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And,dirt can easily get
into your engine, which willdamage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil ischanged.
Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km)if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32”C) or higher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid
and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-15
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Service Department.
Wait at least30 minutes before checkingthe
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
If you do it yourself, be sureto follow all the instructions
here, or you could geta false reading on the dipstick.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
0
NOTICE:
~
Too much or too little fluid can damage
your
of
transmission. Too much can mean that some
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
a fire. Be
parts or exhaust system parts, starting
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
6-16
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F
(82”C to 93 “ C ) .See “Checking Transmission Fluid
Hot” in the Index.
Checking Transmission FluidHot
Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km)when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the enginetemperature gage
moves and thenremains steady for 10 minutes. Then
follow the hot check procedures.
0
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
0
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold check is made after the vehicle has beensitting
for eight hours or more withthe engine off and is used
only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or
more. If it's colder than 50°F ( lO"C), you may haveto
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check, you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in eachrange. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and
then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean
rag or paper towel.
6-17
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checkingthe transmission fluid
while it ishot. (A cold checkis used only as a
reference.) If the fluid levelis low, add only enough
of the proper fluidto bring the level upto the HOT
area for a hot check. It doesn’ttake much fluid,
generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t oveflll.
NOT.ICE:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must bein the COLD area for a
cold check or in the HOT
area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in allthe way; thenflip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that label
is
made especiallyfor your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheckthe fluid level as
described under “Howto Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-18
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine
oil ischanged. However, the fluid inyour manual
transmission doesn't require changing.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmissionis
cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult,you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealership Service
Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, startinga fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
,'.,',
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to thebottom of
the fillerplug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
6-19
How to Add Fluid
When to Check and What to Use
Here’s howto add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kindof fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring thefluid level up to the bottomof the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch system in your vehicleis
self-adjusting. A slight amountof play (1/4 inch to
1/2 inch or 6 rnm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal.
It isn’t a good idea to “topoff” your clutchfluid. Adding
fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected
and repaired.
Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule, Owner Checks
and Services, to determine how often you should check
the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir
and for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checks and
Services” and “RecommendedFluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.
How to Check
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place
in
the reservoir.See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
6-20
Rear Axle
How to Check Lubricant
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
If the level is belowthe bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-21
Four-wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that needlubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
If the levelis below the bottom of thefiller plug hole,
you’ll need to add somelubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom
of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricantto use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-22
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
When the differentialis cold, add enoughlubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in theIndex.
When the differentialis at operating temperature
(warm), add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL B engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehiclefor 5 years or 150,000miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, ifyou add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low.
If you have a problem
with engine overheating,see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of thefiller plug hole,
you may needto add some lubricant.
6-23
A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@ coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection upto 265 “F ( 129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@ coolant
which
won’t damage aluminum parts.If you use this mixture,
you don’t need to add anythingelse.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
A CAUTION:
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When addingcoolant, it is important thatyou use
only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other thanDEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosionmay result. In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused
by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@
is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
--
6-24
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other
liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain wateror thewrong mixture,
your engine couldget too hot butyou wouldn’t
get the overheatwarning. Your engine could
catch fire andyou or otherscould be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL@coolant.
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repaircost wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you haveto add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
I NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives
which claim to
improve thesystem. These canbe harmful.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
ADD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level should be up to FULL HOT, or a littlehigher.
Adding Coolant
If you need morecoolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
6-25
1 Radiator Pressure Cap
lhrning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiator are hot can
allow steam and
scalding liquidsto blow out and burnyou badly.
With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant
at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator arehot.
--
--
Add coolant mixture atthe recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
-
v:
You can be burnedif you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
6-26
I NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must
be tightly installed to
prevent coolantloss and possible enginedamage
from overheating.Be sure the arrowson the cap
line upwith the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
Thermostat
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in theengine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
It isnot necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Power Steering Fluid
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the capand
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
1
The level should be betweenthe ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enoughfluid to bring the level up
to the proper range.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses andseals.
6-27
Windshield Washer Fluid
What toUse
When you need windshield washerfluid, be sureto read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use afluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with
the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.
NOTICE:
0
Adding Washer Fluid
0
0
0
6-28
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damageyour washer fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system.Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluidtank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansionif freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank
if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
have your brake systemfixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t
work at all.
Brakes
Brake .Fluid
~
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. isItfilled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brakefluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal
brake lining wear. When newlinings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up.The other reason is thatfluid is
So, it isn’t a good ideato “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brakefluid, as necessary, only when work
is doneonthebrakehydraulicsystem.
If you havetoo much brake fluid,it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine
is hot enough. You or others could be burned,
brake
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to
check your brakefluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
6-29
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake
fluid without taking off
the cap.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1l @(GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brakefluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brakefluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
A CAUTION:
Just look at the brakefluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure thelevel is above theMIN but not over
the MAX mark or the top of the window
on the side
of the reservoir.
6-30
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. Forexample, just afew
drops of mineral-based oil, such asengine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly thatthey’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be
damaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid
on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound whenthe brake
pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound
may come andgo or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when youare pushing on the brake
pedal firmly).
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon
your brakeswon’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. Whenyou hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads
could result incostly brake repair.
6-31
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are firstapplied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nutsare necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. Whentires are rotated, inspect
brake padsfor wear and evenlytorque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake linings shouldalways be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section
7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to
normal height,or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you makea brake stop, yourdisc brakes
adjust for wear.
6-32
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modem vehicle is complex.
Its many parts haveto be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you haveto have new ones put in-- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts.If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and
rear brakes can change-- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve cometo expect can change in many
other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Every new vehicle has an ACDelcoFreedom@battery.
You never have to add water toone of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco
Freedom battery. Get onethat has the replacement
number shownon the original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
Bulb Replacement
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your batteryfrom
running down.
Before you replace any bulbs, besure that all the lamps
are off and theengine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Battel s have acid that can burn you 2 B gas
that canexplode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting”
in the Index
for tips on working around
a battery without
hu rt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your GM dealer’s service department.
Halogen Bulbs
1 A CAUTIOI.:
I
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burstif you drop or scratch the
bulb. You or
others could beinjured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructionson the bulbpackage.
for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
HISO,
6-33
One-Piece Composite HeadlampSystem
1. Open the hood.
5. Turn the bulb assembly to the left to remove it.
6. Put the new bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it to the right until itis tight.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.
7 . Plug in the electrical connector.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector.
8. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
vehicle. Install the two retaining clips.
6-34
Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System
1. Open the hood.
5 . Turn the bulb assembly to the left to remove it.
6. Put the new bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it to the right until it is tight.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.
3 . Pull the headlamp lens assembly out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
8. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
vehicle. Install the tworetaining clips,
6-35
One-Piece FrontWrn Signal Lamp Assembly
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under
“One-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier in
this section.
2. Twist the bulb
socket to remove
it from the
headlamp
assembly.
6-36
3. Pull the bulb straight out to removeit from
the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps
into place.
5. Put the bulb socket into thelamp assembly and twist
it tothe right until it is tight.
6. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Install the two retaining clips.
Ttvo-Piece Front Tbrn Signal Lamp Assembly
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under
“Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier in
this section.
2. Locate the locking
tabs on the
assembly. Squeeze
the tabs together
and push that end
of the assembly out
while holding the
tabs. The assembly
will swing out.
4. Turn the harness bulb socket to the left to removeit.
5 . Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps
into place.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
6. Put the new bulbinto the headlamp lens assembly
and turn itto the right until it is tight.
7. To replace the assembly, snap the outboard end of
the lamp assembly backinto the vehicle. Thenswing
the assembly in and snap it into place.
6-37
Taillamps
7. Put the socket into the lamp assembly and turn the
socket tothe right until it locks into place.
I . Open the endgate.
8. Install the lamp assembly and screws.
2. Remove the two screws
from the lamp assembly.
9. Close the endgate.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts”
in the
Index for the proper typeof replacement blade.
r;;OTICE:
I
Use care when removingor installing a blade
assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the arm
to fall back and strike the windshield.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Turn the socket to the left to remove it. Push the tab
in while you turn the socketto the left.
5. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until
it clicks.
6-38
1. To remove the old wiperblades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull theinsert from the blade assembly.
A
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
E ArmHook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assemblyto release it from
the wiper arm hook.
0
I
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade claws
(A). Slide the insert all the way throughthe blade
claws at the opposite end(B). The plastic caps (C)
will be forced off as the insertis fully inserted.
6-39
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure thatall other claws are properly
locked on both sides
of the insert slots.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot inthe wiper arm
hook. Pullup until the pivot lockingtab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiperarm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement” in this
section for instructions on how to change the backglass
wiper blade. The backglass wiperblade will not lock
in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade,
so care shouldbe used when pullingit away from
the vehicle.
B
w
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6-40
C
lour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires madeby
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about yourtire warranty and whereto obtain service,see
your GM Warranty bookletfor details.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
I
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading your tires can cause overheating
as a result of too much friction. You could
have an airout anda serious accident. See
“Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
0 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury.Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires arecold.
0 Overinflated tires are morelikely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
0 Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replacethem.
--
The CertificatiodTirelabel, which is on the driver’s
door edge, above the doorlatch, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been
sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s
not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get the following:
0 Too much flexing
0 Too much heat
Tireoverloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-41
I NOTICE: (Continued)
I
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusualwear
Badhandling
Roughride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check yourtires once a month or more. Also, check
the tire pressure of the spare tire.
If you have a compact spare tire, itshould be at
60 psi (420 Wa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gageto check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back the
on valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
6-42
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible
and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time
for New Tires”
and “Wheel Replacement” later in
this section for
more information.
The purposeof regular rotation isto achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
The first
rotation is the most important.See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services’’in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
1Q
i
A C. UTION:
Rust or dirt on wheel,
a
or on the parts to
which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after atime. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be
sure touse a scraper or
wire brush later,if you
need to, to get all the rust
or dirt off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the
Index.)
When rotating yourtires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, don’t include it
in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on theCertificatiomire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the
Index.
6-43
When It’s Timefor New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when yourtires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
0
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
6-44
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well becauseof the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certificatioflire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when itwas new had
a Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new
tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number.
That way
your vehicle will continueto have tires that are designed
to give properendurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normalservice on
your vehicle. If your tires havean all-season tread
design, the TPC number willbe followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace yourtires with those not havinga
TPC Spec number, makesure they are the samesize,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias,
bias-belted or radial) as youroriginal tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Mixing tires could cause
you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure touse the same
size and type tires on all
wheels.
It’s all right to drive
with your compact spare
(if you have one). It was developed for use on
your vehicle.
A CAUTION:
The following information relatesto the system
developed by the UnitedStates National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which gradestires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect
to these
grades, they mustalso conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
If you use bias-ply tires on your
vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/orwheel could
fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-45
-- A, B, C
Treadwear
Temperature
The treadwear grade isa comparative rating basedon
the wear rate of thetire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified governmenttest course.
For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as wellon the government course
as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generationof
heat and its abilityto dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on specified
a
indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can leadto sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passengercar tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum requiredby law.
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are A, B,
and C , and they represent the tire’s ability stop
to on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based
on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
6-46
Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is
established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing
are
not needed. However,if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the
alignment may needto be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may needto be rebalanced.
Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with newGM
original equipment parts. This way, you will
be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for
your GM model.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked,
or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts shouldbe replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimesbe repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditionsexist.
Your dealer will know the kind
of wheel you need.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a
collision in which you or others could be injured
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for replacement.
6-47
NOTICE:
The wrongwheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
sed Replacement Wheels
Putting aused wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t knowhow it’s been usedor
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and cause anaccident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.
6-48
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P235/75R15, P235/70R15 or
31xlOSOR15LT/C size tires, don’t use tire chains.
They can damage your
vehicle because there’s
not enough clearance.
Use another typeof traction device only if its
manufacturer recommendsit for use on your
vehicle and tiresize combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust orremove the
device if it’s contacting yourvehicle, and don’t
spin yourwheels.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
If you have other size tires, use tire chainsonly
where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class“S” type chains that are the proper
size for your tires. Install them on the drive axle
tires (four-wheel-drive vehicles can use chains on
both axles) and tighten them as tightly possible
as
with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and
follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.
If
you can hear the chains contacting your
vehicle,
stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,
slow down until itstops. Driving too fastor
spinning thewheels with chains onwill damage
your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous.Some
are toxic. Others can burst intoflame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. Andalways open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaningthe inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
NailPolishRemover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can alldamage your vehicle, too.
6-49
Don’t use anyof these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
0
ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather,plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-SolventDry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Here are some cleaningtips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
6-50
0
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
0
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
If a ring forms after spotcleaning, clean the entire
area immediately orit will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitchor welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thicksuds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rub
it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove thesuds.
6. Wipe cleaned areawith a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
1 - i c Protection
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed asfollows:
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet that has been
treated with Scotchgard Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water,
which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and
carpet often to keep it looking new.
1 . Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhakingsoda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed asfollows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
TM
Further information on cleaningis available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water anda clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have todo it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don’t get them off quickly. Usea clean cloth
and a vinyvleather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
6-51
Cleaning Leather
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and
a mild soap
or saddle soap and wipe dry with
a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally.Do not use heatto dry.
Use onlya mild soap and water solutionon a soft
cloth or sponge, Commercial cleanersmay affect the
surface finish.
0
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polishor shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
6-52
Care of SafetyBelts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
If you do, it
may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap
and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal. tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to bescraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on theinside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not beattached across
the defogger grid.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, BonAmi’ Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to
the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them necessary;
as
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield,Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak. Apply
Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be onthe blade
or windshield.
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be required. (See
“Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in the Index.)
6-53
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
Cleaning ExteriorLampsLenses
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent)
soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finishis to
keep it clean by washingit often with lukewarmor
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays
of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dishor car washing (mild detergent)soaps.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “AppearanceCare and Materials” in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid
or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto
dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towelto
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
6-54
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishingof your vehicle by
hand may be necessaryto remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “AppearanceCare and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paintfinish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat
Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and
made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible.
If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehiclegaraged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheelsclean using a soft cleancloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A
wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle.Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on thembecause you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle throughan automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush witha tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipeoff any oversprayor splash from all
painted surfaceson the body or wheelsof the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
the paint finish.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicleis damaged andrequires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
6-55
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may developinto a major repair expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can
be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer
or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals usedfor ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur
on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect.
Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando
this for you.
6-56
Although no defect inthe paint job causes this,GM
will repair, atno charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged bythis fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
USAGE
DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth- Wax Treated
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
1050427
I 23 oz. (0.680 L)
Glass Cleaner
1052870
I 16 oz. (0.473L)
Wash Wax Concentrate Cleans and lightly waxes
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
8 oz. (0.237 L)
1052918**
Armor All Protectant
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
16 oz. (0.473 L) Multi-Purpose Interior Clean1052925
er
and floor mats
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Spray on and rinse with water Wheel Cleane
1052929
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils Capture D
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
16 02. (0.473 L)
Cleans and shinesa variety of surface types
Armor All Cleaner
12345002
Shines vehicle without scratching Synthetic C
1
sq. ft. 1234572
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Spray on tire shine
12345725
Silicone Tire Shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377964
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects fini
Cleaner Wax
12377966
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
16 oz. (0.473 L)
12377984
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
**Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See “Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index.
PART NUMBER
I
TM
TM
6-57
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
the model designation,
0
0
paint information and
a list of all productlon options and special
equipment.
Be sure thatthis label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
This is the legal identifierfor your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside yourvehicle. The VIN also
appears on the VehicleCertification and ServiceParts
labels and the certificatesof title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine
code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
You’ll find this label on theinside of the glove box. It’s
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
0 yourVIN,
Add-on Electrical Equipment
I NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working
as
they should.
Your vehicle has anair bag system. Before attemptingto
add anything electricalto your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Headlamps
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by aninternal
circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to goon and off, or in some cases to remain off.
If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from
short circuits by a combinationof fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected bya circuit
breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be
sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current loadis too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problemis fixed or goes away.
Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without-- like the radioor cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
6-59
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Remove the cover by turning the fastenerto the left.
Extra fuses and the fuse extractor
are provided in the
cover. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, push in and turn
the fastenerto the right.
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
Usage
A
Not Used
B
Not Used
1
Headlamp Switch, Body Control
Module, Headlamp Relay
FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
Usage
2
Cigarette Lighter, Data
Link Connector
13
Auxiliary Power
14
Power Locks Motor
3
Cruise Control Module and Switch,
Body Control Module, Heated Seats
15
4WD Switch, Engine Controls
(VCM, PCM, Transmission)
4
Gages, Body Control Module,
Instrument Panel Cluster
16
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint,
SDM Module
17
Front Wiper
18
Not Used
19
Radio Battery
20
Not Used
21
HVAC (Manual), HVAC I
(Automatic), HVAC Sensors
(Automatic)
22
Anti-Lock Brakes
23
Rear Wiper
24
Radio, Ignition
Interior Lights
Not Used
Power Outside Mirror, Power
Lock Relay
8
Courtesy Lamps, Battery Run-Down
Protection
9
HVAC Control Head (Manual)
10
Turn Signal
11
Cluster, Engine Control Module
12
Parking Lamps, Power Window
Switch, Body Control Module,
Ashtray Lamp
6-61
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
J .
,.,:..
I,
.
The fuse block is under the hood at thedriver's side of
the engine compartment.
Remove the cover by turning the fastener to the left. To
reinstall the fuse panel cover, push in and turn the
fastener to the right.
6-62
Name
TRL TRN
TRR TRN
TRL B/U
VEH B/U
RT TURN
LT TURN
LT TRN
Usage
Trailer Left Turn
Trailer RightTurn
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Right TurnSignal Front
Left Turn Signal Front
Left Turn Signal Rear
Name
RT TRN
RR PRK
TRL PRK
LT HDLP
RT HDLP
FR PRK
INT BAT
ENG 1
ECM B
ABS
ECM 1
HORN
BTSI
B N LP
NC
RAP
02
IGN B
Usage
Right Turn SignalRear
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Trailer Parking Lamps
Left Headlamp
Right Headlamp
Front Parking Lamps
I/P Fuse Block Feed
Engine Sensors/Solenoids, MAP,
CAM, PURGE, VENT
Engine Control Module,Fuel Pump,
Module, Oil Pressure
Anti-Lock Brake System
Engine Control ModuleInjectors
Horn
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock
Back-up Lamps
Air Conditioning
Retained Accessory Power
Oxygen Sensor
Column Feed, IGN2, 3,4
Name
DRL
FOG LP
IGN A
STUD #2
PARKLP
LR PRK
IGN C
HTDSEAT
ATC
RRDFOG
HVAC
TRCHMSL
RR WIW
CRANK
HAZLP
VECHMSL
HTDMIR
STOPLP
TBC
Usage
Daytime Running Lamps
Fog Lamps
Starting and Charging IGN 1
Accessory Feeds, Electric Brake
Parking Lamps
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Starter Solenoid, Fuel Pump,PRNDL
Heated Seat
Electronic TransferCase
Rear Defogger
HVAC System
Trailer Center High-MountStop
Lamp
Rear Window Wiper
Clutch Switch, NSBU Switch
Hazard Lamps
Vehicle Center High-Mount Stop Lamp
Heated Mirror
Stoplamps
Truck Body Computer
6-63
Replacement Bulbs
Quantity
Number
Halogen Headlamps,Composite Low Beam
2
9006 HB4
Halogen Headlamps,Composite High Beam
2
9005 HB3
Tail and Stop Lamps
4
3057
Front Sidemarker Lamps
2
194 NA
Front Turn Signal Lamps
2
3157
Turn Signal Lamps
2
3157 NA
Lamps
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4300
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6
VINCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W
Firing Order ......................
1-6-5-4-3-2
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 at 4,400 rpm
Thermostat Specification . . . . . . . . . . . 195OF (9 1 “C)
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.045 inches (0.114 cm)
6-64
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . 1001b-ft (140 N-m)
Tire Pressure . . . . . . See the CertificatiodTirelabel.
See “LoadingYour Vehicle” inthe Index.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are
based on the latest information available at the time of
printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this
manual is not the sameas thepart used in your vehicle
when it wasbuilt, or if you have any questions, please
contact your GM truck dealer.
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12551472
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF52
Air Cleaner Filter ......................
A1163C
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV746C
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit . . . . . . 24200796
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4 1-932
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF48 1
Front Windshield Wiper
Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trico (20 inched50.8cm)
Backglass Wiper Blade . . Trico (14 inched35.6 cm)
Capacities (Approximate)
Cooling System*
Automatic Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 quarts (11.1 L)
Manual Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 I .9 quarts ( I 1.3 L)
Crankcase* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
Automatic Transmission
(Drain and Refill)" . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)
Differential Fluid
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 pints (1.9 L)
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 pints (1.2 L)
Fuel Tank (2-Door Models) . . . . . . . 19 gallons (72 L)
Fuel Tank (4-DOOr Models) . . . . . . . 18 gallons (68 L)
A/C Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . 30 oz. or 2 Ibs. (0.9 kg)
of R-134a
*After refill, the level must be checked.
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If
you're not sure, ask your dealer.
6-65
Vehicle Dimensions*
Wheelbase
SiT10516 .............. 100.5 inches (255.3 cm)
SIT10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.0 inches (271.8 cm)
Length
S10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.0 inches (444.5 cm)
T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.4 inches (445.5 cm)
SiT10506 .............. 181.5 inches (461.0 cm)
Height
S10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.0 inches (167.6 cm)
T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.9 inches (170.0cm)
S10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65.9 inches (167.4 cm)
T10506 ................ 67.0 inches (170.2 cm)
6-66
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.8 inches (1 72.2 cm)
Front Tread
S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.0 inches (139.6 cm)
T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.3 inches (145.4 cm)
Rear Tread
S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.7 inches (138.8 cm)
T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.1 inches (139.9 cm)
*Figures reflect base equipment only.
Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs theseservices to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Definition
Short Trip/City Intervals
Long Tripmighway Definition
Long Tripmighway Intervals
7-7
7-27
7-39
7-43
7-45
7-48
Short Trip/City MaintenanceSchedule
Long Trip/Highway MaintenanceSchedule
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C : Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-1
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
-
El
protection
Plan
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your GM
dealer for details.
7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps
to keep your
vehicle ingood working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even
affect the qualityof the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this sectionis divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service departmentor another qualified
service centerdo these jobs.
Performing maintenance work on vehicle
a
can
be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt,have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks andServices” tells you
what should be checked and when. Italso explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains
important inspectionsthat your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some recommended productsto help keep your vehicle
properly maintained.These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performedon your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenanceis performed, be
sure to write it down in this part.This will help you
determine when yournext maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good ideato keep your maintenance
receipts. They maybe needed to aualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to dosome work on your
vehicle, you will probably wantto get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
- lg Your Mi - Itec3nce Schedule
we at General Motors wantto help you keep your
vehicle in good workingcondition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you maydrive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in makingdeliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use
their
vehicles, maintenance needsvary. You may even need
more frequent checks andreplacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section andnote how you drive. If you have any
questions on howto keep yourvehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should
schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supportedservice people will
perform the work using genuine GMparts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done beforeyou or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
e carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificationire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
e are driven off-road inthe recommended manner. See
“Off-Road Driving WithYour Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle” in the Index.
0
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” inthe Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedulesis
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Maintenance Schedule
Short Trip/City Definition
Short Trip/City Intervals
i
Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is truefor your vehicle:
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
0
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule
if you operate your vehicle under anyof these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down soonel:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and
Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs
first). Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever
occurs first),
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap
and Lines Inspection.
795
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true.Do not use this schedule if the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used
off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule
for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slowez
7-6
I
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100000 km): Engine
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank,
Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
I
Fzlort TripKity Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
I
+ A good
time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections’’ in Part C of this schedule.
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
0
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
0
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at everyoil change. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
More frequent lubrication may be requiredfor
heavy-duty or off-road use.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,
universal joints and brake pedalsprings.
7-7
I
ShortTkiplCityMaintenanceSchedule
1
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
7-8
DATE
MILEAGE
DATE
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote?.)
(Continued)
7-9
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) (Continued)
Cl Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
0 Change engine oil andfilter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information, (See footnote
+.)
7-10
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
MILEAGE
(Continued)
7-11
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
27,000 Miles (45 000 km) (Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
30,000 Miles (50000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
7-12
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
1
I SERVICEDBX I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
and filter every50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
0 Change engine oiland filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)
7-13
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
36,000 Miles (60 000 km) (Continued)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (Seefootnote +.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (Seefootnote **.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
DATE
I
I DATE
I
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle sealsfor leaking. (See footnote **.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axleseals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (Seefootnote +.)
7-14
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I SERVICEDBE
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
I
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of theseconditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under anyof these conditions,change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
7-15
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “TireInspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change boththe fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluiddoesn’t
require change.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 5 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
7-16
+
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
SERVICED BY:
I
MILEAGE
DATE
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95000 km)
I DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
3
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
7-17
1
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
CI Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace aircleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-18
DATE
MILEAGE
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and addfluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first),
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
1
SERVICED BY:
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
(Continued)
7-19
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
66,000 Miles (110 000 km) (Continued)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (Seefootnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
I
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
7-20
~-
DATE
MILEAGE
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
I7 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) orhigher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
I DATE
1
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-21
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
I
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
84,000 Miles (I40 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
7-22
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
I
I SERVICEDBY I
I SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
MILEAGE
(Continued)
7-23
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found intaxi, police or delivery service.
Ifyou do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-24
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
I
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
1
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
ACTUAL I SERVICEDBY: I
I MILEAGE
I
1
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
I
0 Change engine oiland filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
1
DATE
An Emission Control Sewice.
I7 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
MILEAGE
(Continued)
7-25
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)(Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis co )on ts (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service,
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change both thefluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every60 months since last service,
whichever occursfirst). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck.Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-26
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
MILEAGE
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000miles
(166 000 km)should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
See “Owner Checks and Services’’ and“Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
Footnotes
-i- The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s usefullife. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake
cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints and
brake pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
Lubricants” in the Indexfor proper lubricant to use):
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every engine oil change.
7-27
f
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
7,500 Miles ( I 2 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
O
7-28
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
Long TrlpEIighway Maintenance Schedule
When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions,change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000miles (83 000 km).
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
-
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
c
7-29
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
I
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)(Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
lfyou do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
andfilter every50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-30
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
I
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
I
1
DATE
I
I DATE
I
0 Change engine
oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first),
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(Continued)
MILEAGE
7-31
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)(Continued)
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe
conditions listed previously and,
therefore, haven’tchangedyour automatic transmission fluid, changeboththe
fluid and filter. Manual transmissionfluid doesn’t requirechange.
MILEAGE
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)
MILEAGE
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
c] Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under oneor more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you donot use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
andfilter every50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
(Continued)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
>
SERVICED BY:
7-33
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage.Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
7-34
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I SERVICEDBY I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do notuse your vehicle under any of these conditions,change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
O
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)
7-35
I
-- I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
82,500 Miles (137 500 km) (Continued)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check
constant velocityjoints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
O
7-36
DATE
I
Long Tripmighway MaintenanceSchedule
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-37
I Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
I DATE
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
ACTUAL
I MILEAGE
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change boththe fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Contrul Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Indexfor what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressuretest
the cooling system and pressure
cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-38
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVrCEDBy
I
I
I SERVICEDBY I
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performedat the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and addthe proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” inthe Index
for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, asshown in
Part D.
At Least Once a Month
At Each FuelFill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Tin
- ationCheck
Make sure tires are inflated to the correa pressures. See
“Tires” in the Indexfor further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
7-39
At Least Twicea Year
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add
if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission” in the Index.
A fluid loss
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are if needed.
working properly. Lookfor any other looseor damaged
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing job,
its have it
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir.
See
repaired. Have any tornor frayed safety belts replaced.
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” inthe Index. A fluid loss in
this system could indicate a problem. Have the system
Also lookfor any openedor broken air bag coverings,
inspected and repaired at once.
and have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Restraint System Check
At Least Once a Year
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear
or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak
or
miss areasof the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add
if needed. See
“Manual Transmission’’ in the Index. Check
for leaks.
A fluid lossmay indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repairedif needed.
7-40
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the keylock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in PartD.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door and
fuel door hinges, rear
compartment hinges, latches and locks including the
glove box, console doors and the body hood and any
moving seat hardware. Lubricate the hood safety lever
pivot and prop rod pivot.Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transmission)
A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could
be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake’, in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use theaccelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicleneeds service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor.If the starter works whenthe clutch isn’t
pushed all theway down, yourvehicle needs service.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
be
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.It should be parked ona
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to applythe regular brake
immediately if the vehicle beginsto move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever outof
PARK (P) with normal effort.If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
7-41
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brakeset, try to turn
the ignition keyto LOCK in each shiftlever position.
0
With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
0
With a manual transmission,the key should turn to
LOCK only when the shift leveris in REVERSE (R).
On vehicles with a keyrelease button, try to turn the key
to LOCK without pressing thebutton. The key should
turn to LOCK only whenyou press the key button.
Park on a fairlysteep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
0
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal.Do this until the vehicleis
held by the parking brake only.
0
To check thePARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shiftto PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
On all vehicles,the key should come out only in LOCK.
Underbody FlushingService
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
At least every spring, use plain water
to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud anddebris
can collect.
When you are doing this check, yourvehicle
could beginto move. You or otherscould be
injured and propertycould be damaged.Make
sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake atonce should thevehicle begin to move.
7-42
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year(for instance, each
spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s service
department or other qualified service center do these
jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed
at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the powersteering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Lookfor broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position partsas well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up inthe floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings
and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the
radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system a
pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas
needed. Replace any componentsthat have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
7-43
Drive Axle Service
Brake System Inspection
Check readfront axlefluid level and add as needed.
Check constant velocityjoints and axle seals for leaking.
Inspect the complete system.Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads
for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment.You may need to have your brakes
inspected more oftenif your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive)
Inspection
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front
axle and transfercase and add lubricant when necessary.
Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper
installation. More frequent lubrication may be required
on off-road use.
7-44
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic ClutchFluid (GM Part
No. 12345347 or equivalent
System
DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirementsof
NLGI # 2, Category LBor
GC-LB.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity.To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’sengine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench@DEX-COOL’
or Havoline@DEX-COOL@
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
Manual
Transmission
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345349 or
equivalent).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON@-I11 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube
% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
@
7-45
~~
~
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LBor
GC-LB.
Constant
Velocity
Universal Joint
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirementsof
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Differential,
Front and Rear
Axle
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052271) or S A E 80W-90
GL-5 Gear Lubricant.
Clutch Pushrod
to Clutch Fork
Joint
Transfer Case
DEXRON@-I11 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or
equivalent.
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
and Universal
Joints
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate@Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LBor GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube
% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-46
USAGE
~
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Fuel Filler Door Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
and Endgate
Hinges, andRear No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Folding Seat
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Tailgate
Superlube
% (GM Part
Mounted Spare
Tire Carrier (if
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
equipped), Outer
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points and
Hinges
~
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube
% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-47
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in theboxesprovided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenancereceipts. Your ownerinformation portfolio
is a convenientplacetostorethem.
I
Maintenance Record
7-48
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
SERVICED
READING
BY
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
7-49
Maintenance Record
7-50
Section 8 CustomerAssistanceInformation
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8-10
8-1 1
8-1 1
8-1 1
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
m
Chevrolet dealers have thefacilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date informationto promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not
been resolvedto your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has
already been reviewed with thesales, service or parts
manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member
of
dealership management, it appearsyour concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet CustomerAssistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020.In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
0
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
0
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
0
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
0
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-41 36 (Spanish)
0
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
0
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-01 22
0
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-1 315
0
In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporation in Canada at:
(905) 644-4 1 1 2.
8-3
For promptassistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
0
0
0
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number(This is available
from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plateat
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name andlocation
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-4
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information bookletfor addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet,please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistance forText
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers whoare deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer
Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1 -800-243-8872). This toll-free number willprovide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems, If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance Program
A
L
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy" Care:
Toll-freenumber,1-800-CHEV-USA
0
Free towing for warranty repairs
0
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
0
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (Le.,
wrecker services, 1ocksrnitWkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center, As the owner of a 1998 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
8-5
ROADSIDE Courtesy
TM
Care PROVIDES:
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE LocksmiWKey Service (when keys are lost
on the road or lockedinside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumperto Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger car
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retaillease
customers operating 1998 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a periodof 3 years/36,000 miles(60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadsideor dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the rightto
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
0
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0
License plate number
0
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
0
Telephone number where youcan be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased inCanada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the UnitedStates. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800for emergency services.
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation
for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with
the coverage providedby
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to retail purchasersof 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer
for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed duringthe same day.
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days,OR
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any
overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of
rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by your Chevrolet dealer
service management. Claim amounts should
reflect all actual costs.
8-8
Chevrolet Courtesy Transportation isnot part of the
Bumper to BumperNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reservesthe right to make any changesor
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
without notification.
For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet dealer.
Some state insurance regulations make it impracticalto
rent vehicles to people under
21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty rentinga vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburse upto $30/day for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle
Coverage period inthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportationmay be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program.Please consult your
dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
information on CourtesyTransportation.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure youare completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, ifa situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are notsatisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be askedto provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE,but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled whereeligible customers may presenttheir
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution
procedure shouldordinarily take about 40 days fromthe
time you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in the courts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that containsdetailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITEDSTATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could
cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receivessimilar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defectexists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you mayeither call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety fromthe Hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario K l G 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222- 1020 or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel SamDrive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals andother service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
1998 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing
it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR1998 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
intended to provide basic operational information about the
electrical, steering,body, etc.
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
Schedule forall models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1998 GM transmissions, transaxlesand transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$1 5.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manualonly.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Publications are available for current and past
Service Bulletins give technical service information neededmodel GM vehicles.To request an order form, please
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name
of the vehicle.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAILTO:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover)
a
Orders will be mailed within 10 days
of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip w
1-800-782-4356
information within30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
(Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST)
FAX Orders
Only
1-313-865-5927
against
the
original
order.
VEHICLE MODEL
PUBLICATION FORM
TOTAL
PRICE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
NAME
YE
EACH*
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card HoldersOnly)
QTYm
1
9
9
8.
Manual
Service
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
1998
$40.00
Owner's Manual In Portfolio
1998
$15.00
Owner's Manual Without Podfolio
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
0
$1 1998
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMERS NAME)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO
(ATENTION)
P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(STATE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(ZIP CODE)
0
AREA CODE
GM-CHE-ORD98
'(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
0.00
1
TOTAL MATERIAL
Order payable to
Helm. Inc. (USA funds
do 'not send cash.)
only
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
0
0
U.S. Order
Processing
Canadian
Postaee
See Note Beiovij
-
I
Mastercard
VISA
I
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
I
II '
UDiscover
Number:
~
(
mml
~~
~~
~
GRANDTOTAL
$5.00
I
Check
herefrom
ifyouryour
billing
address
is different
shipping
address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
L
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $1 1.50 plus the
US. order processing.
I
&I
8-14
NOTES
Section 9 Index
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
Adding Sound Equipment ........................
3-28
Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-42
Air Bag
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.25.2.69
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
1-27
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-65
Alignment and Balance, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6-55
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna, Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . 2-72, 4-7
6-49
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Armrest,Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
3- 1,3- 10
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
Automatic Headlamp System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission
Check ......................................
7-40
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Operation ...................................
2-18
7-42
Park Mechanism Check ........................
Shifting .....................................
2-18
Starting Your Engine ..........................
2-16
Axle
6-23
Front .......................................
Rear .......................................
6-21
Backglass Wiper. Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Battery .......................................
6-32
ChargeLight ................................
2-69
5-3
Jump Starting .................................
Replacement, Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Warnings ................................
5-3, 5-4
2-44
Battery Run-Down Protection .....................
8-9
BBB Auto Line .................................
Better Business Bureau Mediation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Blizzard, Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Brake Fluid ....................................
6-29
2-22
Brake, Parking .................................
Brake System Warning Light......................
2-71
Brakes
6-32
Adjustment ..................................
Anti-Lock ...................................
4-7
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
9-1
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Where Not to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Where to Put ................................
1-46
CigaretteLighter ............................... 2-57
Circuit Breakers and Fuses ....................... 6-59
Cleaner. Air ................................... 6-14
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ............................ 6-55
Exterior Lamps and Lenses .....................
6-54
Fabric ...................................... 6-50
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
6-50
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
InstrumentPanel .............................
6-52
Interior Plastic Components .....................
6-52
Canadian Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Capacities and Specifications ................. 6.64.6.65
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................ 6-54
CarbonMonoxide ................ 2.9.2.27.4.38.4.45
6-51
Stains ......................................
Cargocover ................................... 2-54
.......................................
6-55
Tires
2-55
Cargo Tie Downs ...............................
Vinyl .......................................6-51
Center Front Passenger Position ................... 1-30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Weatherstrips
Certificatioflire Label ..........................
4-40
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Chains
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Climate Control System .......................
3-2, 3-3
Tire ........................................ 6-48
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Changing a Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -2 1 Clutch, Hydraulic ............................... 6-20
Charging System Light .......................... 2-69
Comfort Controls ................................ 3-1
Check 4WD Light ..............................2-77
Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
2-77
Check Gages Light ..............................
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
ConvenienceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
6-56
Chemical Paint Spotting..........................
2-46
Convex Outside Mirror ..........................
ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Coolant
..................................
5-14,
6-23
Center Seat Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Coolant Heater, Engine ..........................
2-17
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position........... 1-48
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 8-8
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Cruise Control .................................
2-37
Brakes (Continued)
PedalTravel .................................
6-32
6-32
Replacing System Parts ........................
Trailer ......................................4-46
Wear ....................................... 6-31
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock Check ........... 7-41
Braking ........................................ 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ................... . . . . . . . 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..........................
2- 13
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
BTSICheck ................................... 7-41
Bulb Replacement .........................
6-33, 6-62
9-2
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Daytime Running Lamps .........................
2-42
DeadBattery ...................................
5-3
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Dimensions.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
DomeLamps ..................................
2-43
Door
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Drive. Automatic Transmission ....................
2-20
Drive Axle Service ..............................
7-44
Driver Information System .......................
2-50
DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Driving
4-31
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
4-27
Night ......................................
Off-Road ...................................
4-14
4-9
On Curves ...................................
Rainy Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Snowy and Icy Conditions ...................... 4-36
Through Deep StandingWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Driving On Grades While Towing a Trailer
. . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
DrunkenDriving ................................
4-3
E a s y Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28. 6-58
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
2-9
Endgate .......................................
EmergencyRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
ManualRelease .............................. 2-10
Remote Release .............................. 2-11
Engine ........................................
6-9
Coolant Heater ............................... 2-17
Coolant Level Check .......................... 7-39
Coolant Temperature Gage ..................... 2-72
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
7-39
OilLevelCheck ..............................
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
2-28
Running While Parked .........................
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Engine Coolant .................................
6-23
Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
9-3
Engine Oil (Continued)
Checking ................................... 6-1 1
KindtoUse ................................. 6-12
Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Used ....................................... 6-14
When to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 13
Exhaust. Engine ................................ 2-27
ExitLighting ..................................2-43
Express-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Fabric Cleaning ............................... 6-50
Fifth Gear. Manual Transmission ................... 2-21
Filling a Portable Fuel Container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling Your Tank ................................ 6-5
Filter
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Remote Oil ..................................
6-14
Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Finish Damage .................................
6-56
First Gear
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Manual Transmission ..........................
2-2 1
Flashers. Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flat Tire. Changing ............................. 5-21
Fluids and Lubricants ....................... 6-65. 7-45
Franqais 2-42
FogLampSwitch ...............................
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fourth Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Four-wheel Drive .........................
2-29. 6-22..
11
FrenchLanguage Manual ...........................
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Front Map Lamps............................... 2-43
Front Reading Lamps ....................... 2-43. 2-47
9-4
Front Storage Area .............................. 2-53
Front Towing .................................. 5-10
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Fuel .......................................... 6-3
Filling a Portable Container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Foreign Countries .............................. 6-5
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Fuse Block
Engine Compartment ..........................
6-62
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .......................
6-59
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
Fuel .......................................
2-78
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47.2.60
GasCap .......................................
6-5
Gate Ajar Light ................................ 2-77
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
GearPositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Guide en
GVWR .......................................
4-40
Halogen Bulbs ................................
6-33
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
HeadRestraints ................................. 1-7
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Bulb Replacement ............................
6-34
2-35
HighLow Beam Changer ......................
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heated Front Seats ...............................
1-5
Heated Outside Mirrors ..........................
2-46
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Highway Hypnosis ..............................
4-34
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
Hitches. Trailer .................................
4-45
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Hydraulic Clutch ...............................
6-20
Check ......................................
7-40
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Ignition
Positions ....................................
2-14
Transmission Lock Check ......................
7-42
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
2-43
Illuminated Entry ...............................
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.41.7.39
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Inspections
Brakesystem ................................
7-44
Engine Cooling System ........................
7-43
ExhaustSystems .............................
7-43
Front Drive Axle Boot Seal .....................
7-43
Steering ....................................
7-43
Suspension ..................................
7-43
Throttle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
2-64
InstrumentPanel ...............................
Cleaning ....................................
6-52
Cluster ................................
2.65.2.66
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Interior Lamps .................................
2-43
Jacking Equipment .............................
Jump Starting ...................................
5-22
5-3
2-12
K e y in the Ignition .............................
Key Lock Cylinders Service ......................
7-40
Key Release Button .............................
2-15
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Labels
Certificatioflire .............................
4-40
Fuse ..................................
6.60.6.62
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Service Parts Identification .....................
6-58
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-40
2-43
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
FrontMap ...................................
Front Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43.2.47
Interior .....................................
2-43
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Latches. Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-25
2-57
Lighter .......................................
Lights
1.25. 2.69
Air Bag Readiness .......................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72.4.7
Lights (Continued)
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Charging System .............................2-69
Check4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
CheckGages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
GateAjar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
LowFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Safety Belt Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 10. 2.68
Security Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Shift .................................. 2-22. 2.70
Loading YourVehicle ........................... 4-40
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
LockoutPrevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
7-42
Ignition Transmission Check ....................
Key Lock Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 5
Rear Door Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 13
LowFuelLight ................................ 2-78
Lubricants and Fluids.......................
6-65, 7-45
7-40
Lubrication Service, Body ........................
Luggagecarrier ................................ 2-55
LumbarControls ............................ 1-3, 1-4
-
7-48
Maintenance Record ...........................
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Long Tripmighway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 7-27
Owner Checks and Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
9-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Scheduled Maintenance Services.................. 7-4
Short TripKity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.57.
.7
Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...................... 2-73
Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Manual Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Manual Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Fluid .......................................
6-19
2-21
Operation ...................................
Shifting .....................................
2-21
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Heated Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Illuminated Visor Vanity ....................... 2-58
Inside Daymight Rearview ..................... 2-44
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Visorvanity .................................
2-58
ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
N e t , Convenience ..............................
2-54
Neutral
2-19
AutomaticTransmission .......................
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Odometer ....................................
2-67
Off-Road Driving .............................. 4- 14
Off-Road Recovery .............................
4- 11
Oil. Engine ....................................
6-10
Opener. Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47.2.60
Ordering Owner and Service Publications. . . . . . . 8- 11. 8. 12
Outside Mirror
2-45
ManualAdjust ...............................
Power Remote Control .........................
2-45
Convex .....................................
2-46
OverheadConsole ..............................
2-46
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 12
Owner Checks and Services.......................
7-39
8- 11. 8- 12
Owner Publications ........................
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
6-56
Park
Automatic Transmission .......................
2- 18
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Shifting Out of ...............................
2-26
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Brake ...................................... 2-22
Brake Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
4-49
On Hills with a Trailer .........................
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Your Vehicle. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Passlock" ....................................
2-12
4-42
Payload .......................................
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Power
AccessoryOutlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Door Locks ...................................
2-5
Remote Control Mirror ........................
2-45
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Steering Fluid ................................
6-27
Windows ...................................
2-31
Power Seat .....................................
1-3
LumbarControls ..............................
1-4
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Problems on the Road ............................
5-1
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11. 8- 12
Radiator. Adding Coolant .......................
5-17
Radiator Pressure Cap ...........................
6-26
Radio Reception ................................
3-28
Radios
AM-€34 Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 12. 3. 15
Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29.7.39
Compact Disc Player ..........................
3-20
Compact Disc Player Care ......................
3-30
Remote Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Setting the Clock .............................
3-10
Theft-Deterrent Feature ........................
3-26
4-28
Rain. Driving ..................................
2-16
RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear
6-21
Axle .......................................
2-5
Door Security Locks ...........................
1-35
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
1-32
SeatPassengers ..............................
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
9-7
Rear (Continued)
Towing .....................................
5- 11
WindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
2-37
Window Washerwiper ........................
Rearseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 6-65. 7-45
RecoveryHooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 14
Recreational Vehicle Towing ......................
4-39
Replacement
Bulbs ......................................
6-64
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-65
Wheel ......................................
6-45
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Restraints
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
1-7
Head ........................................
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Retained Accessory Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 16
Reverse
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
8-5
Roadside Assistance ..............................
8-7
Canadian ....................................
Rocking YourVehicle ...........................
5-36
6-42
Rotation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
safety Belts ..................................
Adults ......................................
9-8
1- 10
1-15
6-52
Care .......................................
Center Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39.1-53
DriverPosition ...............................
1-15
Extender ....................................
1-56
How to Wear Properly .........................
1-15
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30.1-38
1-15.1-32
Lap-Shoulder ...........................
Questions andAnswers ........................
1-14
Rear Comfort Guides ..........................
1-35
Rear Seat Passengers ..........................
1-32
Replacing After a Crash........................
1-57
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-22
Use During Pregnancy .........................
WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................
7-4
Scheduled Maintenance Services....................
Seatback
1-7
Latches ......................................
RecliningFront ...............................
1-5
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................
Second Gear
AutomaticTransmission .......................
2-20
ManualTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Security Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Service and Appearance Care ......................
6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11. 8- 12
Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Service Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Sheet Metal Damage ............................
6-55
Shift Light ...............................
2.22.2.70
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18. 2.21
2-23
IntoPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Out of Park ..................................
2-26
SignalingTurns ................................
2-34
SIR ..........................................
1-23
Skidding ...................................... 4-13
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64.6.65
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer ...................................
2-67
Stains. Cleaning ................................
6-5 1
Starter Switch Check ............................
7-41
Starting Your Engine ............................
2- 16
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Steering
In Emergencies ...............................
4- 10
Power .......................................
4-9
Steering Wheel. Tilt .............................
2-33
Storage Compartments ...........................
2-46
Storage. Vehicle ................................
6-33
Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
2-57
SunVisors ....................................
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
v
Symbols. Vehicle ..................................
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Taillamp Bulb Replacement .......................
6-38
TapePlayerCare ...............................
3-29
Temperature and Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
THEFTLOCK
...............................
3-26
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
Third. Automatic Transmission ....................
2-20
Third Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Tilt Steering Wheel .............................
2-33
Time.Setting ..................................
3-10
Tire Chains ....................................
6-48
Tire Inflation Check .............................
7-39
Tires
Alignment and Balance ........................
6-47
Buying New .................................
6-44
Changing a Flat ..............................
5-21
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41.7-39
Inspection and Rotation ........................
6-42
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
Temperature .................................
6-46
Traction ....................................
6-46
Treadwear ...................................
6-46
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
6-45
WearIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
1-47
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
5-30. 6-64
Torque. Wheel Nut .........................
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4-39
Towing.RecreationalVehicle .....................
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
Trailer
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
4-48
Driving on Grades ............................
4-47
Driving with a Trailer..........................
Hitches .....................................
4-45
9-9
Trailer (Continued)
Maintenance When Towing ..................... 4-50
Parking on Hills ..............................
4-49
Safety Chains ................................
4-46
Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Turnsignals .................................
4-48
Weight .....................................
4-44
4-50
WiringHarness ...............................
2-29, 6-22
Transfer Case .............................
Transmission Fluid
6- 15
Automatic ...................................
6-19
Manual .....................................
Transmitters, Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Transportation,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Trip, Before Leaving ............................
4-33
TripOdometer .................................
2-67
TTYUsers .....................................
8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Underbody Maintenance ........................
Universal Transmitter............................
Accessories .................................
Erasing Channels .............................
Operation ...................................
Programming ................................
Rolling Code Openers .........................
Used Replacement Wheels........................
6-56
2-60
2-63
2-63
2-62
2-61
2-62
6-48
-4-5
Vehicle control ...............................
iv
Vehicle Damage Warnings ..........................
Vehicle Dimensions .............................
Vehicle Identification Number .....................
Vehicle Loading ................................
VehicleStorage ................................
Ventilation System ...............................
Visors. Sun ....................................
Voltmeter .....................................
6-66
6-58
4-40
6-33
3-7
2-57
2-70
w a r n i n g Devices ...........................
5.2.5.3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................
6-28
Washing Your Vehicle ...........................
6-54
Weatherstrips ..................................
6-53
Wheel Alignment ...............................
6-47
Wheel Nut Torque .........................
5.30.6.64
Wheel Replacement .............................
6-47
Windows
2-32
Express-Down ...............................
2-32
LockoutSwitch ..............................
2-31
Manual .....................................
Power ......................................
2-31
Swing-Out ..................................
2-33
WindshieldWasher .............................
2-36
6-28
Fluid .......................................
FluidLevelCheck ............................
7-39
2-36
WindshieldWiper ..............................
Bladecheck .................................
7-40
BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
2-37
Rear .......................................
Winter Driving .................................
4-36
6-59
Wiring,Headlamp ..............................
WreckerTowing .................................
5-7
.
.>
3057
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising